HomeMy WebLinkAboutItem 7 - Project Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
FOR
CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO
Disinfection Byproduct Reduction and Water Treatment Plant
Pipe Gallery Improvements Project
Specification No.1000044
October 2019
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
ENGINEERING DIVISION
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401
(805) 781-7200
Disinfection Byproduct Reduction and Water Treatment Plant
Pipe Gallery Improvements Project
Specification No. 1000044
Approval Date: October 22, 2019
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BID SUBMISSION ..................................................................................................................................... V
BID DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................................... VI
PROJECT INFORMATION ...................................................................................................................... VII
QUALIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................... VII
AWARD .................................................................................................................................................... IX
ACCOMMODATION ................................................................................................................................. IX
BID FORMS .................................................................................................................... A
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS ................................................................................................................ C
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT .............................................................. D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE ......................................................... D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT ................................................................. D
LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS ................................................................................... D
NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION .......................................................................................................... F
BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS .......................................................................................................... G
QUALIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................................... H
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID ................................................................................... I
SPECIAL PROVISIONS .................................................................................................. 1
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS ....................................................................................................... 1
1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 1
2 BIDDING ............................................................................................................................................. 1
4 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................. 2
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC ....................................................... 3
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS ................................................................................................... 3
99 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................... 4
DIVISION XIII APPENDICES .................................................................................................................... 5
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT ....................................................................... 0
APPENDIX B – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 3
APPENDIX C – CLEARWELL #2 INFORMATION .......................................................... 3
• PSI WATER TECHNOLOGIES, INC. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
• SCOPE OF SUPPLY – THM-100 THM ANALYZER
• CLEARWELL #2 SHOP DRAWINGS
• CLEARWELL #2 DIVE INSPECTION REPORT
APPENDIX D – EDNA SADDLE TANK INFORMATION ................................................. 3
• PSI WATER TECHNOLOGIES, INC. SCOPE OF SUPPLY
• SCOPE OF SUPPLY – CHEMTRAC ANALYZER AND PUMP STATION
• EDNA SADDLE TANK RECORD DRAWINGS
• EDNA SADDLE TANK DIVE INSPECTION REPORT
• EDNA SADDLE TANK LEAD TEST RESULTS
• OWNER-FURNISHED PUMP AND MOTOR DATA
APPENDIX E – PIPE GALLERY INFORMATION ........................................................... 3
• PIPE GALLERY RECORD DRAWINGS
• POTHOLE SUMMARY
• GEOTECHNICAL REPORT FROM NEARBY CITY PROJECT
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID SUBMISSION
Sealed bids will be received by the City of San Luis Obispo at the Public Works
Administration Office located at 919 Palm Street, California 93401, until
2:00 p.m. on November 14, 2019
at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. Submit bid in a sealed envelope
plainly marked:
Disinfection Byproduct Reduction and Water Treatment Plant
Pipe Gallery Improvements Project
Specification No. 1000044
Any bid received after the time and date specified will not be considered and will be
returned to the bidder unopened. Bids received by Fax or Email will not be considered.
By submission of bid you agree to comply with all instruction and requirements in this
notice and the contract documents.
All bids must be submitted on the Bid Item List form(s) provided and submitted with all
other Bid Forms included in these Special Provisions.
Each bid must be accompanied by either a:
1. certified check
2. cashier's check
3. bidder's bond
made payable to the City of San Luis Obispo for an amount equal to ten percent of the
bid amount as a guaranty. Guaranty will be forfeited to the City San Luis Obispo if the
bidder, to whom the contract is awarded, fails to enter into the contract.
The City of San Luis Obispo reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids or waive
any informality in a bid.
All bids are to be compared based on the City Engineer's estimate of the quantities of
work to be done, as shown on the Bid Item List.
Bids will only be accepted from bidders that are licensed in compliance with the provisions
of Chapter 9, Division III of Business and Professions Code.
The award of the contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest responsive bid submitted by a
responsible contractor whose bid complies with the requirements prescribed. If the
contract is awarded, the contract will be awarded within 60 calendar days after the
opening of the bids.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Failure to raise defects in the notice to bidders or bid forms prior to bid opening constitute
a waiver of those defects.
BID DOCUMENTS
A copy of the plans and special provisions may be downloaded, free of charge, from the
City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/public-works-bids-
proposals
A printed copy may be obtained at the office of the City Engineer by paying a non -
refundable fee of:
1. $90.00 if picked up in person, or
2. $120.00 if by mailing to the office of the City Engineer
Request must include Specification Number. The office of the City Engineer is located at:
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401
Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards referenced in the Special Provisions
may be downloaded, free of charge, from the City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/documents-
online/construction-documents
A printed copy may be obtained by paying a non-refundable fee of:
1. $16.00 if picked up in person, or
2. $21.00 if by mailing to the office of the City Engineer
You are responsible to obtain all issued addenda prior to bid opening. Addenda will be
available to download at the City’s website listed above or at the office of the City
Engineer.
Contact the project manager, Jennifer Metz at 805-781-7239 or the Public Works
Department at (805) 781-7200 prior to bid opening to verify the number of addenda
issued.
You are responsible to verify your contact information is correct on the plan holders list
located on the City’s website at:
www.slocity.org/government/department-directory/public-works/public-works-bids-
proposals.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
PROJECT INFORMATION
In general, the project consists replacement of corroded piping within the Water
Treatment Plant pipe gallery, installation of a new effluent line and valving, and the
abandonment of a portion of the existing buried 30-inch pipeline. The project also includes
modifications and equipment installation (mixers, aerators, and ventilators) at two potable
water storage tanks (Clearwell #2 and Edna Saddle Tank).
The project estimated construction cost is $1,817,000
Contract time is established as 140 working days.
The fixed liquidated damages amount is established at $2,150 per day for failure to
complete the work within the contract time.
In compliance with section 1773 of the Labor Code, the State of California Department of
Industrial Relations has established prevailing hourly wage rates for each type of
workman. Current wage rates may be obtained from the Division of Labor at:
https://www.dir.ca.gov/oprl/DPreWageDetermination.htm
This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enfo rcement by the Department of
Industrial Relations.
QUALIFICATIONS
You must possess a valid Class A Contractor's License at the time of the bid opening.
You and any subcontractors required to pay prevailing wage must be registered
with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor
Code.
You must have experience constructing projects similar to the work specified for this
project. Provide three similar reference projects completed as the prime contractor.
• All referenced projects must have been completed within the last ten years from
this project’s bid opening date.
• All referenced projects must be for projects completed under contract with a city,
county, state, or federal government agency as the prime contractor.
• All referenced projects must be for work within an active water distribution system
or water treatment plant.
• All referenced projects must have a total construction cost of greater than
$500,000.
Failure to provide reference projects as specified in this section and as required on the
qualification form is cause to reject a bid as being non -responsive.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
The City reserves the right to reject any bid based on non-responsiveness if a bidder fails
to provide a bid that complies with all bidding instructions.
The City reserves the right to reject a responsive bid based on the non -responsibility of
the bidder if the Director of Public Works or Designee finds, after providing notice and a
hearing to the bidder, that the bidder lacks the
1. knowledge
2. experience,
3. or is otherwise not responsible
as defined in Section 3.24 of the San Luis Obispo Municipal Code to complete the project
in the best interest of the City.
Rejected bidders may appeal this determina tion. Appeal must comply with the
requirements in this Notice to Bidders.
It is the City of San Luis Obispo’s intent to award the contract to the lowest responsive
bid submitted by a responsible bidder. If in the bidder’s opinion the contract has been or
may be improperly awarded, the bidder may protest the contract award.
Protests must be filed no later than five working days after either:
1. bid opening date
2. notification of rejected bid.
Protest must be in writing and received by the project manager located at:
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401.
Valid protests must contain the following information:
1. the reasons for the protest
2. any supporting documentation
3. the ruling expected by the City to remedy the protest.
Any protest not containing all required information will be deemed invalid and rejected.
The City will consider additional documentation or other supporting information regarding
the protest if submitted in compliance to the specified time limits. Anything submitted after
the specified time limit will be rejected and not be considered.
The Director of Public Works or Designee may request additional information to be
submitted within three days of the request, unless otherwise specified, and will notify the
protester of ruling within ten days of determination.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
If the protester is not satisfied with ruling, the protester may appeal the ruling to the City
Council in compliance with Chapter 1.20 of the City of San Luis Obispo Municipal Code.
Pursuant to the Public Records Act (Government Code, § 6250, et seq.), the City will
make public records available upon request.
AWARD
The lowest bidder will be determined using the BID TOTAL.
As a condition to executing a contract with the City, two bonds each equal to one hundred
percent of the total contract price are required in compliance with Section 3-1.05 of the
Standard Specifications.
You may substitute securities for moneys withheld under the contract in compliance with
the provisions of the Public Contract Code, Section 10263.
ACCOMMODATION
If any accommodations are needed to participate in the bid pr ocess, please contact
Argelia Chang at (805) 781-7200 or by Telecommunications Device for the Deaf at (805)
781-7107. Requests should be made as early as possible in the bidding process to allow
time for accommodation.
BID FORMS
A
BID FORMS
All bid forms must be completed and submitted with your bid. Failure to submit these
forms and required bid bond is cause to reject the bid as nonresponsive. Staple all bid
forms together.
THE UNDERSIGNED, agrees that they have carefully examined:
1. the location of the proposed work
2. the plans and specifications
3. read the accompanying instructions to bidders
and propose to furnish all:
1. materials
2. labor
to complete all the required work satisfactorily in compliance with:
1. plans
2. specifications
3. special provisions
for the prices set forth in the bid item list:
Bid Item List for: Disinfection Byproduct Reduction and Water Treatment Plant
Pipe Gallery Improvements Project, Specification No. 1000044
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total
No. SS(1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures)
1 7 Comply with OSHA LS 1
2 14 Health and Safety Plan LS 1
3 99 Clearwell Tank Cleanout LS 1
4 Furnish Clearwell TTHM Reduction
Equipment LS 1 $532,370 $532,370
5 Install Clearwell TTHM Reduction
Equipment LS 1
6 Clearwell THM Analyzer LS 1
7 99 Clearwell Electrical LS 1
8 99 Clearwell Coating Repair LS 1
9 77 Clearwell Disinfection LS 1
10 99 Edna Saddle Tank Cleanout LS 1
11 Furnish Edna Saddle TTHM
Reduction Equipment LS 1 $53,842 $53,842
12 Install Edna Saddle TTHM Reduction
Equipment LS 1
13 Edna Saddle Chlorine Analyzer
System LS 1
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
B
Item Item Unit of Estimated Item Price Total
No. SS(1) Description Measure Quantity (in figures) (in figures)
14 99 Edna Saddle Tank Modifications LS 1
15 77 Edna Saddle Site Work LS 1
16 99 Edna Saddle Electrical LS 1
17 99 Edna Saddle Coating Repair LS 1
18 77 Edna Saddle Disinfection LS 1
19 77 30-Inch Effluent Filter Piping LS 1
20 77 24-Inch Effluent Filter Piping LS 1
21 99 Pipe Gallery Demolition LS 1
22 99 Pipe Gallery Structural Improvements LS 1
23 Chemical Injection Improvements LS 1
24 77 Effluent Pipe Disinfection and
Pressure Testing
LS 1
Bid Total $
Company Name:
(1) refers to section in the Standard Specifications, with modifications in the Special Provisions, that describe required work.
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
C
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Pursuant to Section 4100 of the Public Contracts Code and section 2 -1.33C of the
standard specifications, the Bidder is required to furnish the following information for each
Subcontractor performing more than 1/2 percent (0.5%) of the total base bid. D o not list
alternative subcontractors for the same work. Subcontracting must not total more than
fifty percent (50%) of the submitted bid except as allowed in section 5-1.13 of the standard
specifications.
For Streets & Highways projects, subcontractors performing less than ten thousand dollars
($10,000) worth of work need not be mentioned. Subcontractors required to pay
prevailing wage, must be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations
pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 to be listed.
NOTE: If there are no subcontractors, write “NONE” and submit with bid.
Name Under Which
Subcontractor is Licensed License Number
DIR Public
Works
Registration
Number
Address and Phone
Number of Office, Mill or
Shop
Specific
Description of
Subcontract
% of
Total
Base
Bid
Attach additional sheets as needed.
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
D
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10285.1 STATEMENT
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10285.1 (Chapter 376, Stats. 1985), the
bidder hereby declares under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California
that the bidder, or any subcontractor to be engaged by the bidder, has ____, has not
____ been convicted within the preceding three years of any offenses referred to in that
section, including any charge of fraud, bribery, collusion, conspiracy, or any other act in
violation of any state or federal antitrust law in connection with the bidding upon, award
of, or performance of, any public works contract, as defined in Public Contract Code
Section 1101, with any public entity, as defined in Public Contract Code Section 1100,
including the Regents of the University of California or the Trustees of the California State
University. The term "bidder" is understood to include any partner, member, officer,
director, responsible managing officer, or responsible managing employee thereof, as
referred to in Section 10285.1.
NOTE: The bidder must place a check mark after "has" or "has not" in one of the blank
spaces provided. The above Statement is part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on the signature
portion constitute signature of this Statement. Bidders are cautioned that making a false
certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution.
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10162 QUESTIONNAIRE
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10162, the Bidder must complete, under
penalty of perjury, the following questionnaire:
Has the bidder, any officer of the bidder, or any employee of the bidder who has a
proprietary interest in the bidder, ever been disqualified, removed, or otherwise prevented
from bidding on, or completing a federal, state, or local government project because of a
violation of law or a safety regulation?
Yes No
If the answer is yes, attach a letter explaining the circumstances
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 10232 STATEMENT
In compliance with Public Contract Code Section 10232, you hereby state under penalty of
perjury, that no more than one final unappealable finding of contempt of court by a federal
court has been issued against you within the immediately preceding two-year period
because of your failure to comply with an order of a federal court which orders you to comply
with an order of the National Labor Relations Board.
LABOR CODE SECTION 1725.5 STATEMENTS
The bidder has delinquent liability to an employee or the state for any asse ssment of back
wages or related damages, interest, fines, or penalties pursuant to any final judgment,
order, or determination by a court or any federal, state, or local administrative agency,
including a confirmed arbitration award. Any judgment, order, o r determination that is
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
E
under appeal is excluded, provided that the contractor has secured the payment of any
amount eventually found due through a bond or other appropriate means.
Yes No
The bidder is currently debarred under Section 1777.1 or under any other federal or state
law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works.
Yes No
NOTE: The above Statements and Questionnaire are part of the Bid. Signing this Bid on
the signature portion constitute signature of this Statement and Questionnaire. Bidders are
cautioned that making a false certification may subject the certifier to criminal prosecution.
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
F
NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION
I, , declare that
I am of ,
the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf
of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or
corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not
directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and
has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or
anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone refrained from bidding; that the bidder has
not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or
conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any
overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure
any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the
proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the
bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof,
or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not
pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid
depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.
Executed on , 20 , in __
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing
is true and correct.
(Signature and Title of Declarant)
(SEAL)
Subscribed and sworn to before me
this _______day of _________, 20_____
Notary Public
Company Name:____________________
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
G
BIDDER ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
By signing below, the bidder acknowledges and confirms that this bid is based on the information contained
in all contract documents, including the notice to bidders, plans, specifications, special provisions, and
addendum number(s) . (Note: You are responsible to verify the number of
addenda prior to the bid opening.)
The undersigned further agrees that in case of default in executing the required contract, with necessary
bonds, within eight days, (not including Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays), after having received a
mailed notice that the contract is ready for signature, the proceeds of the check or bond accompanying his
bid will become the property of the City of San Luis Obispo.
Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of contractors, License No. , Expiration
Date .
The above statement is made under penalty of perjury, and any bid not containing this information "will be
considered non-responsive and will be rejected” by the City.
Signature of Bidder
(Print Name and Title of Bidder)
DIR– Public Works
Registration No:
Business Name (DBA):
Owner/Legal Name:
Indicate One: Sole-proprietor Partnership Corporation
List Partners/Corporate Officers:
Name Title
Name Title
Name Title
Business Address
Street Address
Mailing Address
City, State, Zip Code
Phone Number
Fax Number
Email Address
Date
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
H
QUALIFICATIONS
Failure to furnish complete reference information ON THIS FORM, as specified in this
project’s Notice to Bidders and indicated below, is cause to reject the bid. Additional
information may be attached but is not a substitute for this form.
Reference Number 1
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Did this project include underground
pipeline construction?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
Reference Number 2
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Did this project include underground
pipeline construction?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
Reference Number 3
Customer Name & Contact Individual
Telephone & Email
Project Name (Site Address):
Did this project include underground
pipeline construction?
Yes □ No □
Describe the services provided and how this project is similar to
that which is being bid:
Date project completed:
Was this contract for a public agency?
Yes □ No □
BID FORMS
BID FORMS
I
ATTACH BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY BID
Know all men by these presents:
That we ____________________________________________, AS PRINCIPAL, and
_______________________________________________________, AS SURETY, are held and firmly
bound unto the City of San Luis Obispo in the sum of:
____________________________________________________ Dollars (_____________) to be paid to
said City or its certain attorney, its successors and assigns; for which payment, well and truly to be made, we
bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents:
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the certain bid of the above
bounden ______________________________________________________________________
to construct ___________________________________________________________________
(insert name of street and limits to be improved or project)
dated _____________________ is accepted by the City of San Luis Obispo, and if the above
bounden _______________________________________________________, his heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns shall duly enter into and execute a contract for such construction and
shall execute and deliver the two bonds described within ten (10) days (not including Saturdays, Sundays, or
legal holidays) after the above bounden,
______________________________________________________, has received notice by and from the
said City of San Luis Obispo that said contract is ready for execution, then this obligation shall become null
and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and virtue.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we hereunto set our hands and seals this ___ day of ______, 20____.
Bidder Principal:
Signature Date
Title:
Surety:
Bidder's signature is not required to be notarized. Surety's signature must be notarized.
Equivalent form may be substituted
(Rev. 6-30-14)
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
ORGANIZATION
Special provisions are under headings that correspond with the main section heading of
the Standard Specifications. Each special provision begins with a revision clause that
describes or introduces a revision to the Standard Specifications. Any paragraph added
or deleted by a revision clause does not change the paragraph number of the Standard
Specifications for any other reference to a paragraph of the Standard Specifications.
DIVISION I GENERAL PROVISIONS
1 GENERAL
Add to Section 1-1.01 GENERAL:
The work must be done in compliance with the City of San Luis Obispo, Department of
Public Works:
1. Disinfection Byproduct Reduction and Water Treatment Plant Pipe Gallery
Improvements Project Special Provisions
2. City of San Luis Obispo Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards –
2018 edition
3. State of California, Department of Transportation Standard Specifications and
Standard Plans – 2015 edition
In case of conflict between documents, governing ranking must comply with section 5-
1.02 of the City of San Luis Obispo’s Standard Specifications.
Failure to comply with the provisions of these sections is a material breach of contract:
1. Sections 5 through 8 of the Standard Specifications
2. Section 12 through 15 of the Standard Specifications
3. Section 77-1 of the Standard Specifications
4. Section 81 of the Standard Specifications
5. Authorized working hours
6. OSHA compliance
2 BIDDING
Replace Section 2-1.33A BID DOCUMENT COMPLETION AND SUBMITTAL, General
with:
Furnish bid using blank forms provided in the Special Provisions. Bid must include all
forms and must be signed by the bidder.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
2
4 SCOPE OF WORK
Add to Section 4-1.03 WORK DESCRIPTION:
The work involves construction of trihalomethane (THM or TTHM) removal equipment at
two City water storage tanks, and modifications to 24 and 30 -inch filter effluent piping at
the City water treatment plant pipe gallery.
Certain hazards exist, including but not limited to, the presence of lead-bearing paint, and
risks associated with potential failure of the existing 30-inch pipe. Contractor shall prepare
and submit a Health and Safety Plan per City Standard 14 -11.01A.
Construction related to the 2.0 million-gallon Clearwell #2 (located at the City water
treatment plant on Stenner Creek Road) generally consists of installation of one tank
mixer, seven aerators, one tank ventilation system, one online THM analyzer, and an
integrated control panel to control the system. The City will drain the tank prior to
construction.
Construction related to the 4.0 million-gallon Edna Saddle Tank (located near Bluerock
Drive) generally consists of installation of one tank mixer, one tank ventilation system,
one online chlorine analyzer and pumped return system, an owner -furnished pump and
motor, and an integrated control panel to control the system. The City will drain the tank
prior to construction.
Construction related to the pipe gallery will generally consist of installation of a new filter
effluent pipe from within the pipe gallery to a connection point on the existing 30-inch filter
effluent pipe. Work also includes modifications to the structure, improvements to the
chemical injection system and modifications to existing welded steel manifold piping.
Additional details regarding work sequence and schedule, pre-negotiated equipment,
Contractor’s use of premises, and work by others can be found in Specification Section
011100.
Comply with the provisions of Sections 5, 7, 14, 77, 86 and 99 for general, material,
construction, and payment specifics.
6 CONTROL OF MATERIALS
Add Section 6-1.06 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS
The Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to the City, all construction power used
at the project sites.
The Contractor shall make arrangements and provide for adeq uate portable toilet facilities
at the sites. The Contractor shall maintain sanitary facilities until completion of work at
which time the facilities will be removed from the site and premises disinfected.
Coordinate with the City for access to the project site. Maintain site security and operator
access to existing facilities at all times.
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
3
7 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO THE PUBLIC
Replace last paragraph in Section 7-1.02K(3) CERTIFIED PAYROLL RECORDS
(labor code 1776) with:
Furnish the Engineer one Portable Document Format (PDF) file which contains all
certified payroll records for the prior month’s work. Redact the PDF file making the
employee’s social security number illegible. Failure to submit PDF file with other monthly
payroll records is considered an incomplete payroll submission and penalties will be
assessed.
8 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
Add Section 8-1.01A WORK HOUR RESTRICTONS
Work hours are Monday through Friday between 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Night work can
be scheduled with hours to be determined at the discretion the construction
inspector/manager.
Night work is permitted separately. Night work shall comply with the restrictions set forth
in the permit by the City of San Luis Obispo Community Development Department.
Night work is defined as work between the hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M.
Contractor will provide lighting for all night work operations, no exceptions are to be made.
Any contractor personnel working outside the lights will be directed to return to a lighted
area or the operation must be stopped.
All contractor work vehicles, including heavy equipment, backhoes, trenching machines
must have two working headlights and taillights. Vehicles without appropriate lighting will
be kept from working until they are brought to compliance.
Illumination level of 10 foot candles is required for all nighttime operations, which will
normally be achieved with light plants or balloon lights. All lighting fixtures must be
mounted and directed in manner precluding glare to approac hing traffic.
Add Section 8-1.01B ORDER OF WORK
Notice to Proceed (NTP) is scheduled for December 6, 2019. Const ruction shall be
completed by June 1, 2020.
The City has completed the review of THM equipment submittals, and the equipment
vendor will begin fabrication upon receipt of a Purchase Order from the Contractor. The
Contractor shall execute a Purchase Order to PSI Water Technologies for the THM
equipment for the Clearwell #2 and Edna Saddle Tank by December 30, 2019. The
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
4
equipment Scopes of Supply are provided in Appendices A and B of these specifications.
The pre-selected THM removal equipment will arrive onsite on March 13, 2020.
A maximum of one tank may be out of service at any time. Additionally, Contractor shall
provide the City with a minimum of two weeks written notice prior to making modifications
to the pipe gallery that results in taking two of the four filters out of service.
Additional information regarding Work Sequence and Schedule can be found in
Specification Section 011100.
99 BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
See Appendix B for Technical Specifications
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5
DIVISION XIII APPENDICES
1. Appendix A - Form of Agreement
2. Appendix B – Technical Specifications
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
0
APPENDIX A - FORM OF AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made on ______, by and between the City of San Luis Obispo, a
municipal corporation and charter city, San Luis Obispo County, California (hereinafter
called the Owner) and COMPANY NAME (hereinafter called the Contractor).
WITNESSETH:
That the Owner and the Contractor for the consideration stated herein agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1, SCOPE OF WORK: The Contractor shall perform everything required to be
performed, shall provide and furnish all of the labor, materials, necessary tools,
expendable equipment, and all utility and transportation services required to complete all
the work of construction of
NAME OF PROJECT, SPEC NO.
in strict compliance with the plans and specifications therefor, including any and all
Addenda, adopted by the Owner, in strict compliance with the Contract Documents
hereinafter enumerated.
It is agreed that said labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services shall be furnished and
said work performed and completed under the direction and supervision and subject to the
approval of the Owner or its authorized representatives.
ARTICLE II, CONTRACT PRICE: The Owner shall pay the Contractor as full consideration
for the faithful performance of this Contract, subject to any additions or deductions as
provided in the Contract Documents, the contract prices as follows:
Item
No.
Item Unit of
Measure
Estimated
Quantity
Item Price
(in figures)
Total
(in figures)
1.
2.
3.
BID TOTAL: $ .00
Payments are to be made to the Contractor in compliance with and subject to the provisions
embodied in the documents made a part of this Contract.
Should any dispute arise respecting the true value of any work omitted, or of any extra work
which the Contractor may be required to do, or respecting the size of any payment to the
Contractor, during the performance of this Contract, said dispute shall be decided by the
Owner and its decision shall be final, and conclusive.
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
1
ARTICLE III, COMPONENT PARTS OF THIS CONTRACT: The Contract consists of the
following documents, all of which are as fully a part thereof as if herein set out in full, and if
not attached, as if hereto attached:
1. Notice to Bidders and Information for Bidders
2. Standard Specifications and Engineering Standards
3. Special Provisions, any Addenda, Plans and Contract Change Orders
4. Caltrans Standard Specifications and Standard Plans 2015
5. Accepted Bid and Bid Bond
6. List of Subcontractors
7. Public Contract Code Sections 10285.1 Statement
8. Public Contract Code Section 10162 Questionnaire
9. Public Contract Code Section 10232 Statement
10. Labor Code Section 1725.5 Statements
11. Bidder Acknowledgements
12. Qualifications
13. Non-collusion Declaration
14. Agreement and Bonds
15. Insurance Requirements and Forms
ARTICLE IV INDEMNIFICATION: The Contractor shall indemnify, defend with legal
counsel approved by City, and hold harmless City, its officers, officials, employees and
volunteers from and against all liability, loss, damage, expense, cost (including without
limitation reasonable legal counsel fees, expert fees and all other costs and fees of
litigation) of every nature arising out of or in connection with the Contractor’s negligence,
recklessness or willful misconduct in the performance of work hereunder or its failure to
comply with any of its obligations contained in this Agreement, except such loss or damage
which is caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the City. Should
conflict of interest principles preclude a single legal counsel from representing both the City
and the Contractor, or should the City otherwise find the Contractor’s legal counsel
unacceptable, then the Contractor shall reimburse the City its costs of defense, including
without limitation reasonable legal counsel fees, expert fees and all other costs and fees of
litigation. The Contractor shall promptly pay any final judgment rendered against the City
(and its officers, officials, employees and volunteers) with respect to claims determined by
a trier of fact to have been the result of the Contractor’s negligent, reckless or wrongful
performance. It is expressly understood and agreed that the foregoing provisions are
intended to be as broad and inclusive as is permitted by the law of the State of California
and will survive termination of this Agreement.
The Contractor obligations under this section apply regardless of whether such claim,
charge, damage, demand, action, proceeding, loss, stop notice, cost, expense, judgment,
civil fine or penalty, or liability was caused in part or contributed to by an Indemnitee.
However, without affecting the rights of the City under any provision of this agreement, the
Contractor shall not be required to indemnify and hold harmless the City for liability
attributable to the active negligence of City, provided such active negligence is determined
by agreement between the parties or by the findings of a court of competent jurisdiction. In
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
2
instances where the City is shown to have been actively negligent and where the City’s
active negligence accounts for only a percentage of the liability involved, the obligation of
the Contractor will be for that entire portion or percentage of liability not attributable to the
active negligence of the City.
ARTICLE V. It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should
there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the bid of said Contractor,
then this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an acceptance
of the said terms of said bid conflicting herewith.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have hereunto set their hands this
year and date first above written.
CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO
A Municipal Corporation
__________________________________
Derek Johnson, City Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM CONTRACTOR:
Name of Company
________________________________
By:________________________________
J. Christine Dietrick
City Attorney
Name of CAO/President
Its: CAO/PRESIDENT
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
3
APPENDIX B – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX C - CLEARWELL #2 INFORMATION
APPENDIX D – EDNA SADDLE TANK INFORMATION
APPENDIX E – PIPE GALLERY INFORMATION
CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO
DISINFECTION BYPRODUCT REDUCTION PROJECT
AND
WATER TREATMENT PLANT PIPE GALLERY IMPROVEMENTS
DRAFT 90% TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011110 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND PRE-
NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT
017410 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING
019310 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
030500 GENERAL CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION
032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051210 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
DIVISION 06 – PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
065000 STRUCTURAL FRP
066010 FRP LADDERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
099000 PAINTING AND COATING
099198 REMOVAL OF LEAD BEARING COATINGS
099672 MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK
099674 COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK
099752 COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE
099754 POLYETHYLENE SHEET ENCASEMENT
099761 FUSION BONDED EPOXY COATING
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260101 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260519 600V WIRES AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES
260533 RACEWAYS
260534 ELECTRICAL BOXES
260553 BASIC ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312316 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION
400500 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
400520 MANUAL VALVES
400560 AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES
400722 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
400780 SAFETY SPRAY SHIELDS FOR PIPING CONNECTIONS
402001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING
402050 FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS
402057 FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LINED AND COATED STEEL PIPE
402090 PVC PIPE LESS THAN THREE INCHES
402093 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND
PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT 011100-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S011100 - COORDINATION OF
WORK)
SECTION 011100 COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND
PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section generally describes the project and includes [work by others,] work
sequence and schedule, Contractor's use of premises, Owner occupancy, and
maintenance and operation of existing facilities.
1.02 GENERAL NATURE OF WORK
The work involves construction of Trihalomethane removal equipment at two City water
storage tanks, and modifications to 24 and 30-inch filter effluent piping at the City water
treatment plant pipe gallery.
1.03 HEALTH AND SAFETY
Certain hazards exist, including but not limited to the presence of lead-bearing paint, and
the risk associated with failure of the existing 30-inch effluent pipe. Contractor shall
prepare and submit a Health and Safety Plan per City Standard 14-11.01A.
1.04 LOCATION OF PROJECT SITE
The 4.0 million-gallon Edna Saddle Tank project site is located near Bluerock Drive in
the City of San Luis Obispo.
The 2.0 million-gallon Clearwell #2 is located at the City water treatment plant located
on Stenner Creek Road.
The pipe gallery is located at the City water treatment plant located on Stenner Creek
Road.
1.05 WORK BY OTHERS
A. The following construction contracts are planned by the Owner which may restrict
access to and full use of the site:
_____SST?_____________________________________________
B. With respect to work by others, the Owner will require that:
_____________________________________________________
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND
PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT 011100-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S011100 - COORDINATION OF
WORK)
1.06 PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT
The City has pre-negotiated the Scope of Supply and cost for equipment and associated
elements listed below:
THM removal equipment associated with the Clearwell #2 from PSI Water
Technologies, Inc. This equipment is “no equal.” The Scope of Supply and
equipment cost for the THM removal equipment for the Clearwell #2 site is
included in Appendix C and is defined in proposal titled “PSI Water
Technologies, Inc. File No.: P18-3688 Firm Rev3, CA Contractor’s License:
#877235, Prepared on: July 12, 2019.”
The allowance listed on the Bid Form includes a budget for the pre-
negotiated price of this equipment, which includes full compensation for
local sales tax (7.75%), delivery, field services, O&M manuals, and all other
items defined in the document.
The City has obtained and completed the review of THM equipment
submittals.
THM removal equipment associated with the Edna Saddle Tank from PSI
Water Technologies, Inc. This equipment is “no equal.” The Scope of Supply
and equipment cost for the THM removal equipment for the Edna Saddle
Tank site is included in Appendix D and is and is defined in proposal titled
“PSI Water Technologies, Inc. File No.: P18-3741 Firm Rev6, CA
Contractor’s License: #877235, Prepared on: July 12, 2019.”
The allowance listed on the Bid Form includes a budget for the pre-
negotiated price of this equipment, which includes full compensation for
local sales tax (7.75%), delivery, field services, O&M manuals, and all other
items defined in the document.
The City has obtained and completed the review of THM equipment
submittals.
Online THM analyzer equipment associated with the Clearwell #2 from Aqua
Metrology Systems, Limited. This equipment is “no equal.” The Scope of
Supply and equipment cost for the THM analyzer equipment is included in
Appendix C as Quote Number 2980238000002475015. The Contactor shall
include items 1,2, and 3 in the Scope of Work. The City will enter into a
Comprehensive Service Agreement with the Vendor separately.
Online chlorine analyzer equipment and transfer station associated with the
Edna Saddle Site by Charles P. Crowley Company. This equipment is “no
equal.” The Scope of Supply and equipment cost for the chorine analyzer and
transfer station equipment is included in Appendix D as Quotation Number
Q24876CMU.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND
PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT 011100-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S011100 - COORDINATION OF
WORK)
1.07 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE
Contractor Notice to Proceed (NTP) is scheduled for December 6, 2019. Construction
shall be completed by June 1, 2020.
The City has completed the review of THM equipment submittals, and the equipment
vendor will begin fabrication upon receipt of a Purchase Order from the Contractor. The
Contractor shall execute a Purchase Order to PSI Water Technologies for the
THM equipment for the Clearwell #2 and Edna Saddle Tank by December 30,
2019. The equipment Scopes of Supply are provided in Appendices A and B of these
specifications. The pre-selected THM removal equipment will arrive onsite on March
13, 2020.
A maximum of one tank may be out of service at any time. Additionally, Contractor
shall provide the City with a minimum of two weeks written notice prior to making
modifications to the pipe gallery that results in taking two of the four filters out of
service.
Due to time and operational restrictions, the Contractor’s may elect to perform portions
of the work prior to delivery of the THM equipment. For example, work requiring
draining of the Edna Saddle Tank could be performed immediately, such that the tank
can be brought back online prior to delivery of the THM equipment. Upon delivery of
the equipment, work at the Edna site could continue with the tank in service. With the
Edna Tank back in service, work at the Clearwell #2 could commence.
Similarly, work at the pipe gallery could proceed independent to delivery of the THM
equipment.
Before or at the preconstruction conference, Contractor shall submit a Level 1 Critical
Path Method Schedule per City Standard 8-1.02.
1.08 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall not impede City access to, or operation of, the water storage tanks
or water treatment plant.
Portions of the work require coordination with the City to ensure that access to facilities
is maintained and operations are not impacted by the work. Portions of the pipe gallery
piping to be excavated traverses the existing driveway, which is a critical path for trucks
delivering chemicals to the plant. Provide plant staff with two weeks written notice prior
to excavating piping which would impact truck traffic through the site. Plant staff will
schedule chemical deliveries prior to the excavation such that adequate chemical is
onsite for the duration of the work impacting truck traffic.
Work that impacts truck traffic at the water treatment plant site is limited to a maximum
duration of two weeks. After two weeks, the truck route shall be fully restored. If further
construction is necessary, the Contractor shall re-establish safe and reliable truck access
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COORDINATION AND SEQUENCE OF WORK, SCHEDULE, AND
PRE-NEGOTIATED EQUIPMENT 011100-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S011100 - COORDINATION OF
WORK)
over or around the work as determined by the Engineer for a period sufficient for the
City to receive chemical deliveries. Once deliveries are complete, the two-week
construction window shall start again. Providing temporary access for deliveries after the
allowed initial two-week construction period shall be performed at no cost to the City.
1.09 PERMITS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and paying fees for all permits, excluding
those provided by City as described above, required to execute the work as defined in
the contract documents, including the following if applicable:
Name or Type of Permit Name, Address, Telephone Number of
Permitting Agency
State of California, Department of Industrial Relations,
Division of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH):
Permit for Trenching/Excavations Exceeding 5-feet in depth
CAL/OSHA Field Office
Ventura County
1655 Mesa Verde, Room 125
Ventura, CA. 93003
(805) 654-4581
NPDES discharge permit for discharging water for
dewatering, pressure testing, and leakage testing
Central Coast Regional Water Quality Control
Board
895 Aerovista Place, Suite 101
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401-7906
(805) 549-3147
Electrical Construction Permit City of San Luis Obispo Building and Safety
Division
919 Palm Street
San Luis Obispo, CA 93401
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING 017410-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S017410 - CLEANING DURING
CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING)
SECTION 017410 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING
1.01 GENERAL
A. This section includes cleaning during construction and final cleaning on completion of
the work.
B. At all times maintain areas covered by the contract and adjacent properties and public
access roads free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by
construction operations.
C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and
antipollution laws. Do not burn or bury rubbish or waste materials on project site. Do not
dispose of volatile wastes, such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner, in storm or
sanitary drains. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
D. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
1.02 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. During execution of work, clean site, adjacent properties, and public access roads and
dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish to assure that buildings, grounds, and
public properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish.
B. Wet down dry materials and rubbish to lay dust and prevent blowing dust.
C. Provide containers for collection and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
D. Cover or wet excavated material leaving and arriving at the site to prevent blowing dust.
Clean the public access roads to the site of any material falling from the haul trucks.
1.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. At the completion of work and immediately prior to final inspection, clean the entire
project site as follows.
B. Clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment including finishes.
C. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from
sight-exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces; polish surfaces.
D. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
E. Broom clean paved surfaces; rake clean landscaped areas.
F. Remove from the site temporary structures and materials, equipment, and appurtenances
not required as a part of, or appurtenant to, the completed work.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING 017410-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S017410 - CLEANING DURING
CONSTRUCTION AND FINAL CLEANING)
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
SECTION 019310 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
1.01 GENERAL
Submit six copies of all manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals and data
pertinent to equipment supplied for the project. Prepare and organize the material in
three-ring binders with divider tabs and labels. Include a table of contents. Include a
thumb drive of all catalog data in pdf format and all drawings in both pdf and CADD
formats. All pdf files shall be formatted to allow word search.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include:
1. List of equipment furnished for project with name, address, and telephone number
of each vendor.
2. List of serial numbers of equipment furnished.
3. A copy of shop drawings for mechanical, electrical, and instrument equipment in
final form.
4. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists.
5. Tabulation of motor nameplate horsepower, nameplate current, field-measured
current, overload relay setting, and catalog number for polyphase motors.
6. List of fuses, lamps, seals, and other expendable equipment and devices. Specify
size, type, and ordering description. List name, address, e-mail address, website
address, fax number, and telephone number of vendor.
B. Each manual shall contain the following:
1. Manufacturer's identification, including order number, model, and serial number.
2. Blue line prints or reviewed shop drawings and diagrams of all systems.
3. Certified equipment drawings or reviewed shop drawing data clearly marked for
equipment furnished.
4. Complete operating and maintenance instructions for each and every item of
equipment, setting forth in detail and step-by-step the procedure for starting,
stopping, operating, and maintaining the entire system as installed. Include a
schedule of recommended maintenance intervals.
5. Complete parts list of replaceable parts, their part numbers, and the name and
address of their nearest vendor.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
6. Any special emergency operating instruction and a list of service organizations
(including addresses and telephone numbers) capable of rendering emergency
service to the various parts of the system.
7. Copy of manufacturer's equipment guarantees and warranties.
C. Brochures shall be loose leaf with durable plastic or fiberboard covers. Each sheet shall
be reinforced to prevent tearing from continued use, and each brochure shall have the
following information clearly printed on its cover:
1. Project name, name of Owner, and address.
2. Name and address of Owner's Representative.
3. Name and addresses of contractors and subcontractors and department to contact.
4. Telephone number of contractors, including night and emergency numbers.
5. Major equipment vendors' names and telephone numbers.
D. Submit complete manuals at least four weeks before the date of the instructions required
by the subsections on "Manufacturer's Services" in the various specification sections.
E. Operation and maintenance manuals specified herein are in addition to any operation,
maintenance, or installation instructions required by the Contractor to install, test, and
start up equipment.
1.03 EQUIPMENT DATA SHEETS
Provide six sets of equipment data sheets, bound in three-ring binders, summarizing the
equipment manufacturer's maintenance instructions and recommendations. A blank data
sheet and a sample data sheet are attached.
1.04 PAYMENT
Full compensation for work specific in this section and applicable engineering standards
is included in the payment for other bid items unless a bid item of work is shown on the
bid item list.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
Preventive Maintenance and Operating Requirement Sheets
Preventive Maintenance Program Equipment Record Number
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL DATA
Name:
Size:
Serial No.: Model:
Vendor:
Vendor Address:
Type:
Mfr.:
Vendor Rep: Voltage: Amps:
Phone: Phase: rpm:
Maintenance Work to be Done Frequency*
OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE
*D - Daily; W - Weekly; B - Biweekly; M - Monthly; Q - Quarterly;
S - Semiannually; A - Annually.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
SAMPLE
Preventive Maintenance and Operating Requirement Sheets
Preventive Maintenance Program Equipment Record Number
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL DATA
Name: Influent Pump No. 1
Tag No.: P01-1
Size: 15 hp
Serial No.: 123456ABC
Vendor: ABC Pump Co.
Model: 140T Frame
Serial No. 987654ZY
Class F Insulation
W/Space Heater
Vendor Address: Type:
1111 Pump Circle
Newport Beach, CA 92663
Mfr.: DEF Motors, Inc.
Vendor Rep: XYZ Equipment, Inc. Voltage: 460 Amps: 20
Phone: 714/752-0505 Phase: 3 rpm: 1,800
Maintenance Work to be Done Frequency*
1. Operate all valves and check such things as a) bearing
temperature, b) changes in running sound, c) suction
and discharge gauge readings, d) pump discharge rate,
and e) general condition of the drive equipment.
2. Check packing.
3. Checking pumping unit for any dust, dirt, or debris.
(Continued on attached sheet)
D
D
W
OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE
For manufacturer's instructions regarding installation, operation,
maintenance, and trouble shooting of this equipment, see Volume ____, Section
______.
*D - Daily; W - Weekly; B - Biweekly; M - Monthly; Q - Quarterly;
S - Semiannually; A - Annually.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
SAMPLE
Preventive Maintenance and Operating Requirement Sheets
Preventive Maintenance Program Equipment Record Number
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL DATA
Name:
Size:
Serial No.: Model:
Vendor:
Vendor Address:
Type:
Mfr.:
Vendor Rep: Voltage: Amps:
Phone: Phase: rpm:
Maintenance Work to be Done Frequency*
4. Lubricate bearing frame and motor bearings (consult
manufacturer's instructions for type of grease or oil).
5. Disassemble and change or repair the following: a)
impeller, b) shafts, c) shaft sleeve, d) rotary seals,
and e) sleeve bearings.
Q
A
OPERATING REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE
*D - Daily; W - Weekly; B - Biweekly; M - Monthly; Q - Quarterly;
S - Semiannually; A - Annually.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 019310-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S019310 - OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS)
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 1
SECTION 030500 - GENERAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire
reinforcement.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica
fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place
concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete Subcontractor.
e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.
2. Review the following:
a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field
quality control.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 2
b. Construction joints, control joints, isolation joints, and joint-filler strips.
c. Semirigid joint fillers.
d. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances.
e. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures.
f. Concrete finishes and finishing.
g. Curing procedures.
h. Forms and form-removal limitations.
i. Shoring and reshoring procedures.
j. Methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness.
k. Floor and slab flatness and levelness measurements.
l. Concrete repair procedures.
m. Concrete protection.
n. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M.)
o. Protection of field cured field test cylinders.
1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each of the following.
1. Portland cement.
2. Fly ash.
3. Aggregates.
4. Admixtures:
a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,
supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates,
temperature at time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of
concrete placement, curing conditions, and use of other admixtures.
5. Curing materials.
a. Include documentation from color pigment manufacturer, indicating that
proposed methods of curing are recommended by color pigment
manufacturer.
6. Joint fillers.
7. Repair materials.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:
1. Mixture identification.
2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.
3. Durability exposure class.
4. Maximum w/cm.
5. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete.
6. Slump limit.
7. Air content.
8. Nominal maximum aggregate size.
9. Steel-fiber reinforcement content.
10. Synthetic micro-fiber content.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 3
11. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if
permitted.
12. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability-reducing admixture is
compatible with mix design.
13. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture matches
dosage rate used in performance compliance test.
14. Intended placement method.
15. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Curing compounds.
4. Bonding agents.
5. Adhesives.
6. Vapor retarders.
7. Semirigid joint filler.
8. Joint-filler strips.
B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1. Portland cement.
2. Fly ash.
3. Aggregates.
4. Admixtures:
a. Permeability-Reducing Admixture: Include independent test reports,
indicating compliance with specified requirements, including dosage rate
used in test.
C. Research Reports:
1. For concrete admixtures in accordance with ICC's Acceptance Criteria AC198.
2. For sheet vapor retarder/termite barrier, showing compliance with ICC AC380.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 4
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in
manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M
requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified in accordance with NRMCA's "Certification of Ready
Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than
reinforcing steel.
5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents.
2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 5
1. Obtain all concrete mixtures from a single ready-mixed concrete manufacturer for
entire Project.
2. Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same
manufacturer's plant.
3. Obtain aggregate from single source.
4. Obtain each type of admixture from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type II/V, gray.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S Class 3M coarse aggregate or
better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Alkali-Silica Reaction: Comply with one of the following:
a. Expansion Result of Aggregate: Not more than 0.04 percent at one-year when
tested in accordance with ASTM C1293.
b. Expansion Results of Aggregate and Cementitious Materials in Combination:
Not more than 0.10 percent at an age of 16 days when tested in accordance
with ASTM C1567.
c. Alkali Content in Concrete: Not more than 4 lb./cu. yd. for moderately
reactive aggregate or 3 lb./cu. yd. for highly reactive aggregate, when tested
in accordance with ASTM C1293 and categorized in accordance with
ASTM C1778, based on alkali content being calculated in accordance with
ACI 301.
2. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
3. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride in steel-
reinforced concrete.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.
E. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable
2.03 CURING MATERIALS
A. Water: Potable or complying with ASTM C1602/C1602M.
B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming, Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1,
Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 6
a. BASF Corporation.
b. ChemMasters, Inc.
c. Dayton Superior.
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
e. SpecChem, LLC.
f. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
2.04 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, in accordance with
ASTM D2240.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of
grade and class to suit requirements, and as follows:
1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
2.05 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis
of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other
than portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 15 percent by mass.
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and
workability.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Class A: Normal-weight concrete used for footings, grade beams, and tie beams.
1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 F2 S0 C1.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
3. Maximum w/cm: 0.45.
4. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
5. Air Content:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 7
a. Exposure Classes F2: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery
for concrete containing 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
6. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 1.00 percent by
weight of cement.
B. Class C: Normal-weight concrete used for interior slabs-on-ground.
1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 F2, S0, C1.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
3. Maximum w/cm: 0.45.
4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lb/cu. yd.
5. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
6. Air Content:
a. Do not use an air-entraining admixture or allow total air content to exceed 3
percent for concrete used in trowel-finished floors.
b. Exposure Classes F2: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery
for concrete containing 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
7. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 1.00 percent by
weight of cement.
2.07 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with
ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories, and
reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have
been performed.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections,
acceptable to testing agency, including the following:
1. Daily access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 8
3. Secure space for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including
source of water and continuous electrical power at Project site during site curing
period for test samples.
4. Security and protection for test samples and for testing and inspection equipment
at Project site.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.
3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in
outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
shelf angles, and other conditions.
3.04 JOINTS
A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random cracks.
3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded
items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.
1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and
deficient installation, and repair defective areas.
2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and
make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 9
B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement of
concrete placement.
C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete
delivery ticket.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete delivery
ticket.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes
of weakness.
1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design
pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance
with ACI 301.
a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.
b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to
rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.
c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity.
d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate
concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.
2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.
6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 10
8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
3.06 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:
1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing
material.
a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch.
c. Tie holes do not require patching.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D.
e. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
2. ACI 301Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing
material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.
a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch.
c. Patch tie holes.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B.
e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces:
1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces.
2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.07 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Trowel Finish:
1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel.
2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and
uniform in texture and appearance.
3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or
floor coverings.
4. Do not add water to concrete surface.
5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content greater
than 3 percent.
6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 11
7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for
a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Slabs on Ground:
1) Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete
surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting
on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed
3/16 inch .
3.08 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In:
1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the
Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
2. Construct concrete bases 6 inches high unless otherwise indicated on Drawings,
and extend base not less than 6 12121212 inchesinchesinches in each direction
beyond the maximum dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings, or unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days.
4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
5. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices.
a. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions
furnished with items to be embedded.
b. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases.
c. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
3.09 CONCRETE CURING
A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
1. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during curing.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 12
2. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1 for hot-weather protection during curing.
3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations.
B. Curing Formed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:
1. Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and
other similar surfaces.
2. Cure concrete containing color pigments in accordance with color pigment
manufacturer's instructions.
3. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.
4. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of
curing period, as follows:
a. Continuous Fogging: Maintain standing water on concrete surface until final
setting of concrete.
b. Continuous Sprinkling: Maintain concrete surface continuously wet.
c. Absorptive Cover: Pre-dampen absorptive material before application; apply
additional water to absorptive material to maintain concrete surface
continuously wet.
d. Water-Retention Sheeting Materials: Cover exposed concrete surfaces with
sheeting material, taping, or lapping seams.
e. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous
operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1) Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application.
2) Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
C. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Comply with ACI 308.1 as follows:
1. Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete.
2. Interior Concrete Floors:
a. Floors to Receive Floor Coverings Specified in Other Sections: Contractor
has option of the following:
1) Absorptive Cover: As soon as concrete has sufficient set to permit
application without marring concrete surface, install prewetted
absorptive cover over entire area of floor.
a) Lap edges and ends of absorptive cover not less than 12-inches.
b) Maintain absorptive cover water saturated, and in place, for
duration of curing period, but not less than seven days.
2) Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with
moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and
sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
a) Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using
cover material and waterproof tape.
b) Cure for not less than seven days.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 13
3) Ponding or Continuous Sprinkling of Water: Maintain concrete
surfaces continuously wet for not less than seven days, utilizing one, or
a combination of, the following:
a) Water.
b) Continuous water-fog spray.
b. Floors to Receive Curing Compound:
1) Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
2) Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application.
3) Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing
period.
4) Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound
without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by
curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing
compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on
Project.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to ACI 117.
3.11 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s).
2. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave
contact faces of joints clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed
joints.
D. Overfill joint, and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete:
1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 14
2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's
approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to
2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the
surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more
than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete.
a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch.
b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding
agent.
d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding
color.
a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching.
b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:
1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surface.
a. Correct low and high areas.
b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a
sloped template.
2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless
of width, and other objectionable conditions.
3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing surface-
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar.
a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 15
a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and
level surface.
b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.
a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to
match adjacent floor elevations.
b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and
level surface.
7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel
reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent.
c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete,
except without coarse aggregate.
d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar.
a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off dust,
dirt, and loose particles.
b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy
adhesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector to perform field tests and
inspections and prepare testing and inspection reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
1. Testing agency shall be responsible for providing curing container for composite
samples on Site and verifying that field-cured composite samples are cured in
accordance with ASTM C31/C31M.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 16
2. Testing agency shall immediately report to Architect, Contractor, and concrete
manufacturer any failure of Work to comply with Contract Documents.
3. Testing agency shall report results of tests and inspections, in writing, to Owner,
Architect, Contractor, and concrete manufacturer within 48 hours of inspections
and tests.
a. Test reports shall include reporting requirements of ASTM C31/C31M,
ASTM C39/C39M, and ACI 301, including the following as applicable to
each test and inspection:
1) Project name.
2) Name of testing agency.
3) Names and certification numbers of field and laboratory technicians
performing inspections and testing.
4) Name of concrete manufacturer.
5) Date and time of inspection, sampling, and field testing.
6) Date and time of concrete placement.
7) Location in Work of concrete represented by samples.
8) Date and time sample was obtained.
9) Truck and batch ticket numbers.
10) Design compressive strength at 28 days.
11) Concrete mixture designation, proportions, and materials.
12) Field test results.
13) Information on storage and curing of samples before testing, including
curing method and maximum and minimum temperatures during initial
curing period.
14) Type of fracture and compressive break strengths at seven days and 28
days.
C. Batch Tickets: For each load delivered, submit three copies of batch delivery ticket to
testing agency, indicating quantity, mix identification, admixtures, design strength,
aggregate size, design air content, design slump at time of batching, and amount of water
that can be added at Project site.
D. Inspections:
1. Headed bolts and studs.
2. Verification of use of required design mixture.
3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams
and slabs.
E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained in accordance
with ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed in accordance with the following
requirements:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 17
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each
additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength
tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M:
a. One test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than
one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
b. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231/C231M pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; .
a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's
pour of each concrete mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M:
a. One test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and
above, and one test for each composite sample.
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C567/C567M fresh unit weight of structural lightweight
concrete.
a. One test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's
pour of each concrete mixture.
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M:
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of three 6-inch by 12-inch or 4-inch by 8-
inch cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
b. Cast, initial cure, and field cure two sets of three standard cylinder specimens
for each composite sample.
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M.
a. Test one set of three laboratory-cured specimens at seven days and one set of
two specimens at 28 days.
b. Test one set of three field-cured specimens at seven days and one set of two
specimens at 28 days.
c. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from
a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at
age indicated.
8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion
laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide
corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive
strength, and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive
strength by more than 500 psi if specified compressive strength is 5000 psi, or no
compressive strength test value is less than 10 percent of specified compressive
strength if specified compressive strength is greater than 5000 psi.
10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device
may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or
rejection of concrete.
11. Additional Tests:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL CONCRETE
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 17 Sep 2019
030500- 18
a. Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or
other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.
b. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of
concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other
methods as directed by Architect.
1) Acceptance criteria for concrete strength shall be in accordance with
ACI 301 section 1.6.6.3.
12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not
comply with the Contract Documents.
3.14 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:
1. Protect from petroleum stains.
2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.
3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.
4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.
5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.
6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019
032000- 1
SECTION 032000 - CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel reinforcement bars.
1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Review the following:
a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field
quality control.
b. Construction contraction and isolation joints.
c. Steel-reinforcement installation.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each type of steel reinforcement.
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with ACI SP-066:
1. Include placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.
2. Include bar sizes, lengths, materials, grades, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, location of splices, lengths of lap splices, details of
mechanical splice couplers, details of welding splices, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
C. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to build the
structure.
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019
032000- 2
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing
indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending
and damage.
1. Store reinforcement to avoid contact with earth.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, deformed.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Steel Tie Wire: ASTM A1064/A1064M, annealed steel, not less than 0.0508 inch in
diameter.
1. Finish: Plain.
2.03 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019
032000- 3
A. Protection of In-Place Conditions:
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder.
2. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials
that reduce bond to concrete.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing and supporting
reinforcement.
B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
1. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete
cover.
2. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
C. Preserve clearance between bars of not less than 1 inch, not less than one bar diameter,
or not less than 1-1/3 times size of large aggregate, whichever is greater.
D. Provide concrete coverage in accordance with ACI 318 or Construction drawings,
whichever is greater.
E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F. Splices: Lap splices as indicated on Drawings.
1. Bars indicated to be continuous, and all vertical bars shall be lapped not less than
36 bar diameters at splices, or 24 inches, whichever is greater.
2. Stagger splices in accordance with ACI 318.
3. Mechanical Splice Couplers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated on
Drawings.
3.03 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.
2. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length, to prevent concrete bonding to one
side of joint.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONCRETE REINFORCING
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019
032000- 4
3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with ACI 117.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Inspections:
1. Steel-reinforcement placement.
C. Manufacturer's Inspections: Engage manufacturer of structural thermal break insulated
connection system to inspect completed installations prior to placement of concrete, and
to provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 051210-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S051210 - STRUCTURAL
ALUMINUM)
SECTION 051210 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section describes materials, fabrication, and installation of structural aluminum.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Concrete Construction: 030500.
B. Painting and Coating: 099000.
1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA
Structural Connections and Framing: AISC 360 Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings (June 22, 2010) and ADM1-2015 Aluminum Design Manual: Part 1 - A
Specification for Aluminum Structures, except connection details that are shown in the
contract drawings.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit placing or erection drawings that indicate locations of fabricated items.
Reproductions of contract documents will not be accepted for this purpose.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM
Materials for all-purpose bolted or welded construction shall conform to the following:
A. 6061-T6: Channel, Rectangular Tube, Angle, and Plate
B: Grating shall be McNichols Products or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Store structural material, either plain or fabricated, above ground on platforms, skids, or
other supports. Keep material free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter and protect
from corrosion.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM 051210-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S051210 - STRUCTURAL
ALUMINUM)
3.02 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Fabricate miscellaneous metal items to straight lines and true curves. Drilling and
punching shall not leave burrs or deformations. Continuously weld permanent
connections along the entire area of contact. Exposed work shall have a smooth finish
with welds ground smooth. Joints shall have a close fit with corner joints coped or
mitered and shall be in true alignment. Unless specifically indicated in the drawings,
there shall be no bends, twists, or open joints in any finished member nor any projecting
edges or corners at intersections. Conceal fastenings wherever possible. Built-up parts
shall be free of warp. Exposed ends and edges of metal shall be slightly rounded.
B. Clean the surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete of rust, dirt, grease, and
other foreign substances before placing concrete.
C. Set embedded metalwork accurately in position when concrete is placed and support
rigidly to prevent displacement or undue vibration during or after the placement of
concrete. Unless otherwise specified, where metalwork is to be installed in recesses in
formed concrete, said recesses shall be made, metalwork installed, and recesses filled
with dry-pack mortar in conformance with Section 030500.
3.03 WELDING
A. Perform welding on aluminum by the gas metal arc (MIG) or gas tungsten arc (TIG)
process. Welding shall conform to the AWS D1.2-2014.
B. Provide a minimum of two passes for metal in excess of 5/16-inch thickness.
C. Produce weld uniform in width and size throughout its length with each layer of
weldment smooth; free of slag, cracks, pinholes, and undercuttings; and completely
fused to the adjacent weld beads and base metal. Avoid irregular surface, nonuniform
bead pattern, and high crown. Form fillet welds of the indicated size of uniform height
and fully penetrating. Accomplish repair, chipping, and grinding of welds in manner that
will not gouge, groove, or reduce the base metal thickness.
3.04 CORROSION PROTECTION OF ALUMINUM SURFACES
A. Coat aluminum surfaces to be embedded or which will be in contact with concrete or
masonry, per Section 099000, System No. 54 before installation. Allow the coating to
dry before the aluminum is placed in contact with the concrete.
B. Where aluminum surfaces come in contact with dissimilar metals, except stainless steel,
keep the dissimilar metallic surfaces from direct contact by use of neoprene gaskets or
washers.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL FRP 065000-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S065000 - STRUCTURAL FRP)
SECTION 065000 STRUCTURAL FRP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, installation, and testing of structural FRP elements and
members used for ladders in potable water tanks.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. FRP Ladders: 066010.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit layouts of ladder supports and framing which indicate locations and dimensions
of structural elements, support points, and support framing.
C. Submit fabrication drawings of framing. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
bills of material.
D. Submit details of connections and supports for tank brackets, ladders, and equipment.
E. Submit calculations for the design of ladder framing. Calculations shall be sealed and
signed by a civil or structural engineer licensed in the state of California.
F. Submit certificate of compliance with NSF Standard 61 for FRP framing.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Materials shall be manufactured by Strongwell, Creative Pultrusions Incorporated, or
equal.
2.02 LADDERS
See Section 066010.
2.03 FRP
A. Manufacture FRP products using a pultrusion process utilizing a polyester resin
conforming with NSF Standard 61, with flame-retardant inhibitor additives. A synthetic
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL FRP 065000-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S065000 - STRUCTURAL FRP)
surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surface. The FRP shapes
shall achieve a flame spread of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. After fabrication, seal cut ends, holes, and abrasions of FRP shapes with a compatible
NSF 61 certified resin coating to prevent intrusion of moisture.
C. Exposed surfaces shall be smooth and true to form.
D. Construct structural shapes from a polyester resin with fire-retardant additives to meet
Class 1 flame rating of ASTM E84 and meet the self-extinguishing requirements of
ASTM D635.
E. Structural FRP member composition shall consist of a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester
resin matrix, approximately 50% resin-to-glass ratio. A synthetic surface veil shall be the
outermost layer covering the exterior surfaces. Continuous glass strand rovings shall be
used internally for longitudinal strength. Continuous strand glass mats shall be used
internally for transverse strength.
F. Color of FRP material shall be OSHA Safety Yellow. The color shall be achieved using
pigmented resin. Do not paint.
G. The following minimum mechanical properties shall apply:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL FRP 065000-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S065000 - STRUCTURAL FRP)
Fiberglass Pultruded Material Properties
Minimum Ultimate Coupon Properties
Material Properties for Pultruded
Fiberglass Structural Shapes
ASTM Test
Method Value
Ultimate tensile stress in longitudinal
direction (psi)
D638 30,000
Ultimate compressive stress in longitudinal
direction (psi)
D695 30,000
Ultimate flexural stress in longitudinal
direction (psi)
D790 30,000
Ultimate short beam shear in longitudinal
direction (psi)
D2344 4,500
Ultimate tensile stress in transverse
direction (psi)
D638 7,000
Ultimate compressive stress in transverse
direction (psi)
D695 15,000
Ultimate flexural stress in transverse
direction (psi)
D790 10,000
Density (lb/cubic inch) D792 0.060 to 0.070
Water absorption (24-h immersion) D570 0.60 max,
% by weight
Barcol hardness D2583 45
Coefficient of thermal expansion (in/in/°C) D696 8 x 10-6
Expansion (in/in/°F) 4.4 x 10-6
Thermal conductivity (Btu-in/ft2/hr/°F) C177 4
Flame-Retardant Properties
ASTM Test
Method Value
Flammability test D635 Self-extinguishing
Surface burning characteristics E84 25 maximum
Flammability class UL 94 VO
Temperature index UL 94 130°C
2.04 FASTENERS
Fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A193, Grade
B8M or ASTM F593, Type 316. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194, Grade 8M or
ASTM F594, Type 316. Use ASTM A194 nuts with ASTM A193 bolts; use ASTM
F594 nuts with ASTM F593 bolts. Provide washers (minimum 1/8 inch thick) of the
same materials as the nuts. Provide washer under each nut and bolthead.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
STRUCTURAL FRP 065000-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S065000 - STRUCTURAL FRP)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
After delivery to the site, check FRP items for cracks, holes, and other characteristics
listed in ASTM D2563, Table I. Remove from the project site any FRP item not
complying with ASTM D2563, Table I, Level II.
3.02 FIELD MEASUREMENTS FOR EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Measure the layout of existing ladder framing, and accessories with respect to hatches,
tank wall, and tank floor.
B. Measure the location of existing piping, conduit, and equipment connected to or
supported by existing ladder.
3.03 SEALING FIELD-CUT FRP
Seal field-cut FRP with an NSF 61 certified resin that is compatible with the original
resin as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FRP LADDERS 066010-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S066010 - FRP LADDER)
SECTION 066010 FRP LADDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, fabrication, and installation of FRP ladders in potable
water tanks.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Structural FRP: 065000.
1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Ladders: The design of FRP ladder systems including connections shall meet the
requirements set forth in OSHA 1910.23 and 1926.1053, UBC, local building codes and
industry standards as applicable.
B. Design live load of 150 psf, maximum deflection of 1/240 of span.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit calculations for fabricated items showing dimensions, materials of construction,
and verifying compliance with the specified design criteria. Calculations shall also
include the following data on the structural elements: section properties; flexural, tensile,
compressive, and shear strengths; weight per foot; and modulus of elasticity.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 FIBERGLASS LADDERS
Construct fiberglass ladders from pultruded structural fiberglass shapes. Rungs shall be
1.25-inch-diameter pultruded rod with fluted skid resistant surface. Color of ladders shall
be OSHA Safety Yellow. Design and construct ladders to meet the requirements as set
forth in Part 1, “Design Criteria.” The distance between rungs shall not exceed 12 inches
and shall be uniform throughout the length of the ladder. The minimum clear length of
rungs shall be 16 inches. Ladders shall be attached to the structure wall with Type 316
stainless steel anchor bolts. The ladders shall be pultruded fiberglass ladder system as
manufactured by Strongwell or approved equal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FRP LADDERS 066010-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S066010 - FRP LADDER)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Store structural material, either plain or fabricated, above ground on platforms, skids, or
other supports. Keep material free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter.
3.02 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Fabricate FRP items to straight lines. Drilling and punching shall not leave burrs or
deformations. Exposed work shall have a smooth finish. Joints shall have a close fit and
shall be in true alignment. Unless specifically indicated in the drawings, there shall be no
bends, twists, or open joints in any finished member nor any projecting edges or corners
at intersections. Conceal fastenings wherever possible. Built-up parts shall be free of
warp.
B. For FRP items to be in contact with concrete, clean the surfaces of dirt, grease, and other
foreign substances before placing concrete.
C. Seal cut edges with NSF-61 certified resin.
3.03 LADDERS
A. Install ladders in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
SECTION 099000 PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and application of painting and coating systems for the
following surfaces:
A. Submerged metal.
B. Exposed metal.
C. Buried metal.
D. Metal in contact with concrete.
E. Fusion-bonded epoxy coated steel.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. General Concrete Construction: 030500.
B. Cold-Applied Wax Tape Coating: 099752.
C. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets showing the following information:
1. Percent solids by volume.
2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thickness per coat for prime,
intermediate, and finish coats.
3. Recommended surface preparation.
4. Recommended thinners.
5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the
manufacturer for use with the specified intermediate and finish coats.
6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and temperature
limitations.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
7. Curing requirements and instructions.
C. Submit color swatches.
D. Submit certificate and supplier’s data sheets identifying the type and gradation of
abrasives used for surface preparation. The certificate or data sheets shall specifically
identify that the abrasives comply with federal and state of California regulations for
materials to be used for abrasive blasting for surface preparation for paints and coatings.
E. Submit material safety data sheets for each coating.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PAINTING AND COATING SYSTEMS
The following index lists the various painting and coating systems by service and
generic type:
PAINT COATINGS SYSTEM INDEX
No. Title Generic Coating
Submerged Metal Coating Systems
7. Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water Epoxy
Exposed Metal Coating Systems
10. Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment High-build epoxy (two-coat
system)
Buried Metal Coating Systems
21. Buried Metal Epoxy
24. Buried Metal Corrosion-resisting grease
Concrete and Masonry Coating Systems
32. Exposed Concrete and Masonry, Atmospheric
Weathering Environment
Acrylic
54. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon
Steel
Epoxy
Coating System for Fusion Epoxy-Coated Steel Surfaces
66. Fusion Epoxy-Coated Steel, Color Coding Epoxy
These systems are specified in detail in the following paragraphs. For each coating, the
required surface preparation, prime coat, intermediate coat (if required), topcoat, and
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
coating thicknesses are described. Mil thicknesses shown are minimum dry-film
thicknesses.
2.02 SUBMERGED METAL COATING SYSTEMS
A. System No. 7--Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water:
Type: Epoxy.
Service Conditions: For use with structures, valves, piping, or equipment immersed in
potable or nonpotable water.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10.
Coating System: Apply the manufacturer’s recommended number of coats to attain the
specified minimum dry-film coating thickness. Products: Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Tnemec
100, Scotchkote 323, Tnemec N140, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80,
Scotchkote 306, PPG AQUAPON® LT NSF Low Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-172,
Carboline Carboguard 891, PPG Amercoat 395FD, or approved equal; 16 mils total.
Color of topcoat: white. Each coat shall be different color than the one preceding it.
2.03 EXPOSED METAL COATING SYSTEMS
A. System No. 10--Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment:
Type: High-build epoxy finish coat having a minimum volume solids of 60%, with an
inorganic zinc prime coat.
Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes subjected to water
condensation; chemical fumes, such as hydrogen sulfide; salt spray; and chemical
contact.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10 near white blast clean with a 2 mil minimum angular
anchor profile.
Prime Coat: Self-curing, two-component inorganic zinc-rich coating or organic zinc rich
coating recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating with a high-build epoxy
finish coat. Minimum zinc content shall be 12 pounds per gallon. Apply to a thickness of
2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. Products: Tnemec 904 H2O Hydro Zinc, Devoe Catha-Coat 304 or
304V, International Interzinc 22HS, PPG Dimetcote 9HS, Carboline Carbozinc 11HS,
Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad II Plus, PPG METALHIDE® 28 Inorganic Zinc-Rich
Primer 97-672, or approved equal.
Finish Coat: Tnemec V69 Epoxoline, Devoe Devran 224HS or 231, International
Interseal 670HS, PPG Amercoat 385, Carboline Carboguard 890, Sherwin-Williams
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
Macropoxy 646 B58-600, PPG PITT-GUARD® Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating
97-145 series, or approved equal; 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT.
2.04 BURIED METAL COATING SYSTEMS
A. System No. 21--Buried Metal:
Type: High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80%
(ASTM D2697).
Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as valves, flanges, bolts, nuts, structural steel,
and fittings.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10.
Coating System: Apply three or more coats of PPG Amerlock 400 or 400VOC, Tnemec
104HS or 80, Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Carboline 890LT, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad
HS B62-80 series, or approved equal; 30 mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual
coating shall not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. System No. 24--Buried Metal:
Type: Corrosion-resisting grease.
Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as bolts, bolt threads, tie rods, and nuts.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-3 or SP-6.
Coating: NO-OX-ID GG-2 as manufactured by Sanchem, Inc. Apply to a minimum
thickness of 1/4 inch.
C. System No. 32--Exposed Concrete and Masonry, Atmospheric Weathering
Environment:
Type: Acrylic enamel or acrylic latex having a minimum volume solids of 36%.
Service Conditions: Exposed concrete or masonry exposed to normal sunlight and
weathering.
Surface Preparation: In accordance with Part 3, subsection on “Preparation of Concrete
and Masonry Surfaces To Be Coated.”
Prime Coat: Water-borne acrylic or cementitious acrylic emulsion having a minimum
solids volume of 40%. Apply one coat of Carboline Sanitile 100 to fill all voids, pores,
and cracks; Devoe Bloxfill 4000; PPG Amerlock 400 BF; Tnemec 54-562 Masonry
Filler; International Intercryl 320WB; Sherwin-Williams Heavy Duty Block Filler
B42W46; PPG SPEEDHIDE® Int/Ext Acrylic Masonry Block Filler 6-15; or approved
equal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
Finish Coat: Two coats of Carboline 3359, two coats of Devoe 4208, two coats of PPG
Amercoat 220, two coats Tnemec Series 6, two coats of International Intercryl 530WB
520, Sherwin-Williams Metalatex Semi-Gloss B42 series, two coats of PPG Int/Ext
Semi-Gloss Acrylic Metal Finish 7-374 series, or approved equal. Apply to a thickness
of 2 mils per coat.
2.05 COATING SYSTEMS FOR NONFERROUS METALS
A. System No. 54--Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel:
Type: High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80%
(ASTM D2697).
Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members or
aluminum fabrications, in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system.
Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam cleaning per SSPC SP-1; do not use alkali
cleaning. Then dust blast.
Coating System: Apply three or more coats of PPG Amerlock 400 or 400VOC, Tnemec
Series 135, Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy B58-600, PPG PITT-
GUARD® Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 series, or approved equal; 30
mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.06 COATING SYSTEMS FOR FUSION EPOXY-COATED STEEL SURFACES
A. System No. 66--Fusion Epoxy-Coated Steel, Color Coding:
Type: Epoxy having a minimum volume solids content of 60%.
Application: Color coding of pipe or steel surfaces already coated with fusion bonded
epoxy.
Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-1. Then sweep blast the epoxy surface per SP-7 to
provide a 2- to 3-mil profile in the fusion-bonded epoxy substrate.
Prime Coat: None.
Finish Coat: One coat of Carboline 890, Tnemec 104, International Interguard 760HS,
PPG Amercoat 385, Devoe Devran 224HS, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600
series, PPG PITT-GUARD® Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 series, or
approved equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 5 mils.
2.07 ABRASIVES FOR SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Abrasives used for preparation of ferrous (excluding stainless steel) surfaces shall be one
of the following:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
1. Recyclable fused copper slag.
2. 16 to 30 or 16 to 40 mesh silica-free sand or mineral grit.
3. 20 to 40 mesh garnet.
4. Crushed iron slag, 100% retained on No. 80 mesh.
5. SAE Grade G-40 or G-50 iron or steel grit.
B. In the above gradations, 100% of the material shall pass through the first stated sieve
size and 100% shall be retained on the second stated sieve size.
C. Abrasives shall meet all requirements of the California Air Resources Control Board for
content and emissions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS
A. Do not paint in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog or when steel or metal surface
temperatures are less than 5°F above the dew point.
B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity is above 85%.
C. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above 120°F.
D. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if air or
surface temperature is below 40°F or expected to be below 40°F within 24 hours.
E. Do not apply epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints on an exterior or interior
surface if air or surface temperature is below 60°F or expected to drop below 60°F in 24
hours.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION PROCEDURES
A. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Use clean
cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a film or
greasy residue on the cleaned surfaces before abrasive blasting.
B. Remove weld spatter and weld slag from metal surfaces and grind smoothly rough
welds, beads, peaked corners, and sharp edges including erection lugs in accordance
with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3. Grind 0.020 inch (minimum) off the weld caps on pipe
weld seams. Grind outside sharp corners, such as the outside edges of flanges, to a
minimum radius of 1/4 inch.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
C. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in one day than can be coated in one
day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day. Remove sharp edges, burrs, and
weld spatter.
D. Do not abrasive blast PVC, CPVC, or FRP piping or equipment. Do not abrasive blast
epoxy- or enamel-coated pipe that has already been factory coated, except to repair
scratched or damaged coatings.
E. For carbon steel, do not touch the surface between the time of abrasive blasting and the
time the coating is applied. Apply coatings within two hours of blasting or before any
rust bloom forms.
F. Surface preparation shall conform with the SSPC specifications as follows:
Solvent Cleaning SP-1
Hand Tool Cleaning SP-2
Power Tool Cleaning SP-3
White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-5
Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-6
Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP-7
Pickling SP-8
Near-White Blast Cleaning SP-10
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SP-11
Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other
Hard Materials by High- and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water
Jetting Prior to Recoating
SP-12
Surface Preparation of Concrete SP-13
G. Wherever the words “solvent cleaning,” “hand tool cleaning,” “wire brushing,” or “blast
cleaning” or similar words are used in these specifications or in paint manufacturer’s
specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC (Society for
Protective Coatings), surface preparation specifications listed above.
H. For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, the height of the surface profile
shall be 2 to 3 mils. Verify the surface profile by measuring with an impresser tape
acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Perform a minimum of one test per 100
square feet of surface area. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative.
The impresser tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and
locations where the test was made. Test results shall be promptly presented to the
Owner’s Representative.
I. Do not apply any part of a coating system before the Owner’s Representative has
reviewed the surface preparation. If coating has been applied without this review, if
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-8
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
directed by the Owner’s Representative, remove the applied coating by abrasive blasting
and reapply the coat in accordance with this specification.
3.03 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING
A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning for metal surfaces. Do not use abrasives in automatic
equipment that have become contaminated. When shop or field blast cleaning with
handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles.
B. After abrasive blast cleaning and prior to application of coating, dry clean surfaces to be
coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting. Apply the
specified primer or touch-up coating within the period of an eight-hour working day. Do
not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Reclean prior to application of primer or
touch-up coating any blast cleaned surface not coated within said eight-hour period.
C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles to
accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard.
D. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast
cleaning and coating such that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale,
etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces.
3.04 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES TO BE COATED
A. Surface preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC
SP-13 and the following.
B. Do not apply coating until concrete has cured at least 30 days. Finish concrete surfaces
per Section 030500. Do not use curing compound on surfaces that are to be coated.
C. Concrete and masonry surfaces on which coatings are to be applied shall be of even
color, gray or gray-white. The surface shall have no pits, pockets, holes, or sharp
changes of surface elevation. Scrubbing with a stiff-bristle fiber brush shall produce no
dusting or dislodging of cement or sand. Sprinkling water on the surface shall produce
no water beads or standing droplets. Concrete and masonry shall be free of laitance and
slick surfaces.
D. Detergent clean the concrete or masonry surface with trisodium phosphate per ASTM
D4258. Then sandblast surfaces (brush-off blast). Floor slabs may be acid etched per
ASTM D4260 in lieu of sandblasting. After sandblasting, wash surfaces with water to
remove dust and salts, per ASTM D4258 or D4261. The grain of the concrete surface to
touch shall not be rougher than that of No. 10 mesh sand.
E. Acceptance criteria for concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC SP-13, Table
1, “Severe Service.”
F. Do not apply coatings to concrete when the concrete is outgassing. Apply coatings only
when the concrete surface temperature is stable, not rising.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-9
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
3.05 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. After application of primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of two
hours before handling to minimize damage.
B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to
separate items to prevent damaging the shop-primed surfaces during transit and
unloading. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the shop-
primed surfaces after separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the
loaded items and minimize damage to the shop-primed surfaces.
C. Cover shop-primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent
deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.
D. Handle shop-primed items with care during unloading, installation, and erection
operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store shop-primed items on the ground
or on top of other work unless ground or work is covered with a protective covering or
tarpaulin. Place shop-primed items above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other
supports.
3.06 FIELD TOUCH-UP OF SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS
A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC
SP-1. Use clean rags wetted with a degreasing solution, rinse with clean water, and wipe
dry.
B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface contaminants that
will affect the adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use a high-pressure water
blaster or scrub surfaces with a broom or brush wetted with a solution of trisodium
phosphate, detergent, and water. Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water.
C. Remove loose or peeling primer and other surface contaminants not easily removed by
the previous cleaning methods in accordance with SSPC SP-7. Take care that remaining
primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Remaining primers shall be
firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with blast cleaned edges feathered.
D. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage, and
erection in accordance with SSPC SP-10. Take care that remaining primers are not
damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch may be
prepared per SSPC SP-11. Remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel
surfaces with cleaned edges feathered.
E. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protects adjacent primer. Blast cleaning
may require the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles, and abrasive particle sizes,
short blast nozzle distance from surface, shielding, and/or masking.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-10
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
F. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast
particles, and other debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the
specified touch-up coating.
G. Surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch-up of the same primer used in
the original prime coat.
3.07 PAINTING SYSTEMS
A. All materials of a specified painting system, including primer, intermediate, and finish
coats, shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other
additives shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the particular coating
system.
B. Deliver paints to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers.
3.08 PAINT STORAGE AND MIXING
A. Store and mix materials only in areas designated for that purpose by the Owner’s
Representative. The area shall be well-ventilated, with precautionary measures taken to
prevent fire hazards. Post “No Smoking” signs. Storage and mixing areas shall be clean
and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Tightly close containers after each use. Store
paint at an ambient temperature from 50°F to 100°F.
B. Prepare multiple-component coatings using all of the contents of the container for each
component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Do not use partial batches. Do not
use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. Provide
small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas. Mix only the
components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer. Do not intermix
additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic
type of coating.
3.09 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Conform to the requirements of SSPC PA-1. Follow the recommendations of the coating
manufacturer including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners,
thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety
precautions.
B. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application.
Power mix components. For multiple component materials, premix each component
before combining. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other
evidence of poor workmanship. Use a different shade or tint on succeeding coating
applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from
defects or blemishes.
C. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning is
allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-11
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not flood the
coating material surface with thinner prior to mixing. Do not reduce coating materials
more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics and to
obtain the specified dry-film thicknesses.
D. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast cleaned surfaces by dusting,
sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good
visibility of working area prior to coating applications. Remove dust from coated
surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming prior to applying succeeding coats.
E. Apply coating systems to the specified minimum dry-film thicknesses as determined per
SSPC PA-2.
F. Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or
any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Reclean surfaces by blast cleaning
that have surface colored or become moist prior to coating application.
G. Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces
prior to the application of the primer and finish coat. Apply the brush coat prior to and in
conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the brush coat.
H. Before applying subsequent coats, allow the primer and intermediate coats to dry for the
minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall the time
between coats exceed the manufacturer’s recommendation.
I. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely, and there shall be a
visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors.
J. Applied coating systems shall be cured at 75°F or higher for 48 hours. If temperature is
lower than 75°F, curing time shall be in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner’s Representative.
K. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to ensure
complete coverage by the required coating.
3.10 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED
Do not paint the following surfaces unless otherwise noted in the drawings or in other
specification sections. Protect during the painting of adjacent areas:
A. Concrete walkways.
B. Mortar-coated pipe and fittings.
C. Stainless steel.
D. Aluminum handrail, stairs, and grating.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-12
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
3.11 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum
surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and
other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials
from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of mechanical and
electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask
openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors.
3.12 SURFACES TO BE COATED
The exact coating to be applied in any location is not designated by the descriptive
phrases in the coating system titles such as “corrosive environment,” “buried metal,” or
“submerged metal.” Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below:
A. Coat aboveground and exposed piping or piping in vaults and structures as described in
the various piping specifications. Color of finish coat shall match adjacent piping.
B. Coat submerged steel piping per System No. 7.
C. Coat valves as described in the various valve specifications. Aboveground valves, or
valves in vaults and structures, shall match the color of the connecting piping.
D. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete per System No. 54.
E. Coat buried flanges, nuts and bolts, valves, flexible pipe couplings, exposed rebar in
thrust blocks, and valve boxes per System No. 21. Coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt
threads, and nuts per System No. 24.
3.13 DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING
A. Measure coating thickness specified for carbon steel surfaces with a magnetic-type dry-
film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA-2. Provide certification that the gauge
has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past six months. Provide dry-film
thickness gauge as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer.
B. Test the finish coat of metal surfaces (except zinc primer and galvanizing) for holidays
and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector, low-voltage, wet-sponge type.
Provide measuring equipment. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated
by a certified laboratory within the past six months. Provide detector as manufactured by
Tinker and Rasor or K-D Bird Dog.
C. Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within eight hours
after application of the coating.
D. For metal surfaces, make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings)
spaced evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured.
Make three readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PAINTING AND COATING 099000-13
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099000 - PAINTING AND
COATING)
the probe or detector a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each new gauge reading. Discard any
unusually high or low reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average
(mean) of the three readings as the spot measurement. The average of five spot
measurements for each such 100-square-foot area shall not be less than the specified
thickness. No single spot measurement in any 100-square-foot area shall be less than
80%, nor more than 120%, of the specified thickness. One of three readings which are
averaged to produce each spot measurement may underrun by a greater amount as
defined by SSPC PA-2.
E. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner’s Representative.
3.14 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES
If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat
the surface with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage.
Sandblast or power-sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering
the edges. Then prime and finish coat in accordance with the specifications. Work shall
be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections.
3.15 CLEANING
A. During the progress of the work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at
the end of each day’s work.
B. Thoroughly clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each period of
use and when changing to another paint or color.
C. Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other protective
materials, using care not to damage finished surfaces.
3.16 PAYMENT
Full compensation for work specific in this section and applicable engineering standards
is included in the payment for other bid items unless a bid item of work is shown on the
bid item list.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
SECTION 099198 REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The exterior coatings of the Edna Saddle Tank contain lead. Results of lead testing
performed on the Edna Saddle Tank can be found in Appendix D.
B. This section describes the materials, processes, protective measures, and inspection for
the removal and disposal of lead-bearing paint and coatings from steel tanks.
C. The work shall include removal of the lead-bearing paint to bare metal on the tank,
piping, and other appurtenances that require recoating or are within cutting zones.
Package and transport lead-bearing waste material to a California Department of Health
Services-approved waste disposal site for such materials with the following options:
1. Option A: Hazardous materials permanently stored at a waste disposal facility.
2. Option B: Hazardous materials processed by either a recycling or incineration
facility.
D. Provide and operate required safety equipment including respiratory and protective gear.
Contractor is also responsible for personal monitoring of Contractor personnel and
posting access restrictions required during the course of work.
E. Perform work in compliance with federal, state, and local laws and regulations including
the following:
1. EPA.
2. OSHA Rule on Lead Exposure in Construction (29 CFR 1926.62)
3. California Hazardous Waste Control Act.
4. Title 8, California Code of Regulations including Section 5216.
5. Title 22, California Code of Regulations, Chapter 30.
6. Title 26, California Code of Regulations.
7. Department of Health and Safety.
8. CAL/OSHA including Section 5144.
9. Division 2, Health and Safety Code Chapter 6.5.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
10. SSPC Guides 6 and 7.
11. San Luis Obispo County Air Pollution Control District (APCD).
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Existing Steel Water Tank: 099672.
B. Coatings for Steel Water Tank (Epoxy): 099674.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Health and Safety Plan (HSP) per City Standard 14-11.01A
B. Submit manufacturer's literature on equipment to be used for removal and packaging of
contaminated materials.
C. Submit list of projects and owners where equipment has been used and list of projects
which Contractor has performed removal of lead-bearing or other contaminated
materials.
D. Submit description of removal procedure including method, secondary precautions,
containment, and limitations in removal and in the techniques used.
E. Submit description of procedures of packaging and transporting lead-bearing material.
F. Submit manufacturer's catalog description of safety equipment and procedures.
G. Submit name of hazardous waste transporter including EPA license number and permit.
H. Submit name and address of hazardous waste disposal site where the contaminated
material will be deposited including license number.
I. Submit completed uniform hazardous waste shipping manifest.
J. Submit completed inspection and test reports for monitoring requirements during
removal operations.
1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
At least seven days prior to start of removal of the coating and after review of submittal
Items 1 through 7, submit a schedule and arrange for a conference with the Owner's
Representative, Owner, and manufacturers of equipment to be used in the removal of the
coatings to coordinate the following:
A. Safety equipment and procedures including personnel changing room.
B. Procedures for removal, containment, packaging, and transporting of lead-bearing and
other materials.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
C. Posting and access restrictions required during course of work.
D. Owner's inspection.
E. Specification compliance for removal and handling of lead-bearing materials.
F. Schedule removal operation and transportation of lead-bearing waste.
G. Weather limitations.
H. List of equipment for removal operations.
I. Manpower.
1.05 OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Owner's Representative will observe all phases of lead-bearing coating removal and
packaging of lead-bearing materials for transporting. Contractor shall provide 24 hours'
notice prior to removal or handling of lead-bearing materials.
B. The Owner's Representative may monitor for airborne and site contamination for
compliance with Title 8, California Code of Regulations, Section 5216 and Title 22 of
the California Code of Regulations (Article II, Section 66699).
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring his personnel in accordance with
Title 8, California Code of Regulations, Section 5216 and OSHA 29 CFR 1926.62.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PACKAGING HAZARDOUS WASTE
Containers for packaging lead-bearing waste shall meet EPA and Department of
Transportation requirements for hazardous materials.
2.02 GROUND COVERS
Manufacture tarpaulins for ground cloths and diapers of material that cannot be
contaminated with dust particles impregnated into the fabric.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Use equipment designed for removal of hazardous materials that will not contaminate
the environment with its own generated material or the removed material and will not
generate additional hazardous waste beyond the coating material removed.
B. Equipment shall be vacuum needle guns with HEPA type filters as manufactured by
Pentek, Inc., or equal. A centrifugal shot blast system with vacuum disposal and HEPA
filters may be used for horizontal surfaces.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
2.04 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT
Equipment shall be in good working order and seals and filters shall be maintained to
prevent contamination beyond the disposal system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LIMITATIONS ON REMOVAL OF COATING
A. The specified limitations for the removal of contaminated coatings is intended to prevent
airborne soil and water contamination of the project site and area adjacent to the project
site.
B. No removal shall take place when weather conditions prevent full containment of
removed material.
C. No removal shall take place in rain, snow, or winds greater than 5 mph without Owner's
Representative's inspection.
D. The Owner may allow removal when winds are above 5 mph if equipment and
procedures demonstrate full containment of removed material.
3.02 CONTAINMENT SYSTEM
Provide a containment system in accordance with SSPC-Guide 6, Class 3P.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION PRIOR TO REMOVING COATING
A. Remove loose dirt and foreign material by sweeping or other means that will not remove
the coating.
B. Remove deposits of grease and oil with a solvent that will not remove coating.
3.04 SAMPLING AND TESTING
The Contractor shall obtain four representative samples of surface preparation debris at
the completion of the job. Send samples to a state-approved laboratory to test for
leachable lead per EPA Method 1311. A Chain of Custody form shall accompany the
samples; follow procedures described in SSPC 7I, Section 5.6.3-b and c. Depending on
the leachable lead concentration, the waste may be determined to be hazardous, per
SSCP 7I, Section 5.8.
3.05 METHOD OF REMOVAL
A. The removal of contaminated coating to bare metal shall be in compliance with SSPC
SP-11 using one or both of the following two methods. Perform removal using a vacuum
needle gun method for all areas except that which a centrifugal shot blast system may be
used. Use both methods in conjunction with a HEPA vacuum type disposal system
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
which filters and contains the hazardous materials and separates the abrasive from the
hazardous materials where required.
B. Paint strippers may be used on inaccessible areas when reviewed by the Owner's
Representative.
C. Use ground tarpaulins and/or diapers to collect any particles that may escape the
vacuum.
D. Tenting of areas and the use of conventional sand blasting will not be permitted.
3.06 STORAGE OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Storage of lead-bearing and other hazardous materials shall be in containers meeting the
requirements of EPA and California Code of Regulations. Mark containers with the
following information:
1. Manifest document number.
2. Composition and physical state.
3. Statement that calls attention to particular hazardous properties, i.e., toxic,
reactive, etc.
4. Name of waste generator (Owner): City of San Luis Obispo.
5. Name, address, and phone number of Contractor.
6. Name of transportation and EPA identification number (to be provided by Owner).
7. Total quantity of material by volume.
8. Initial date material was packaged.
B. Do not store hazardous materials onsite longer than 60 days.
C. At the end of each shift, seal hazardous materials in containers. Store these materials in a
vandal-resistant enclosure when containers are left unattended.
3.07 TRANSPORTING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
Hazardous materials shall be packaged, manifested, and transported by a licensed
hazardous waste hauler to a hazardous waste disposal site in compliance with
governmental regulations and these specifications.
3.08 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS
A. Ship hazardous materials to a disposal facility or waste broker for treatment and
disposal. Follow the procedures outlined in SSPC-Guide 7, Section 6.3.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF LEAD-BEARING COATINGS 099198-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099198 - REMOVAL OF LEAD
BEARING PAINT)
B. Nonhazardous materials shall be disposed of at a Subtitle D landfill.
3.09 NOTIFICATION
Provide a copy of all documentation to the Owner within 10 days of origination. Mail
with registered mail signed receipt; provide copy to the Owner.
3.10 PREPARATION FOR FINISH COATING
Upon removal of the lead-bearing coating materials from the tank, piping, and
appurtenances to bare metal and upon completion of inspections and tests, prepare the
surface to obtain required surface profile and coat per Section 099674.
1.01 PAYMENT
Full compensation for work specific in this section and applicable engineering standards
is included in the payment for other bid items unless a bid item of work is shown on the
bid item list.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
SECTION 099672 MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section describes modifications and the application and inspection of the protective
coatings to be utilized on the interior and exterior surfaces of the Owner’s existing 4 MG
Edna Saddle steel water tank, and the 2.0 MG Clearwell Reservoir #2.
The Edna Saddle Tank is a 170'-0" diameter and 25'-0" tall ground supported welded
steel reservoir containing potable water. The tank will be out of service during this
project, and will be drained by the Owner to within three inches of the floor. The tank
site is located south of Bluerock Drive in San Luis Obispo. The tank is serviced by a
narrow access road which will limit the size and quantity of equipment practical for use
on this project. No fall protection anchor point is present on the tank roof. The roof is
partially protected by guardrail.
The Clearwell Reservoir #2 is a 107'-0" diameter and 33'-0" tall ground supported
welded steel reservoir containing potable water. The tank was constructed in 2007. The
tank will be out of service during this project, and will be drained by the Owner to
within three inches of the floor. The tank site is located at the City water treatment plant
in San Luis Obispo.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Removal of Lead-Bearing Coatings: 099198.
B. Coating for Steel Water Tank (Epoxy): 099674.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
1.04 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
The following guidelines, documents, and references are to assist the Contractor in
performing its duties for cleaning, surface preparation, and application of the coating
systems. The documents listed form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
A. Quality Control: The following references provide the means of maintaining quality
control of the blasting and coating systems:
1. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC), Surface Preparation Specifications,
Publication No. 98-01.
2. SSPC-PA Series (Paint Application Guides).
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
3. NACE, RPO287-02, Field Measurement of Surface Abrasive Blast Cleaned
Surfaces Using a Replica Tape.
4. ASTM D4138, Standard Method of Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of
Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means.
5. ASTM D4285, Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed
Air.
6. ASTM D4414, Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by
Notch Gages.
7. U.S. Weather Bureau psychometric tables.
B. California and Local Regulations: The Contractor is solely responsible for
accomplishing work in a safe manner, complying with, but not limited to, the following
regulations:
1. CAL/OSHA, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety
Orders, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Order.
2. California Air Resources Board, Title 17, Subchapter 6, Abrasive Blasting.
3. Dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with California Health and Safety Code,
Division 20, Chapter 6.5, Hazardous Waste Control and Title 22, California
Administrative Code, Chapter 30, Minimum Standards for Management of
Hazardous and Extremely Hazardous Materials.
4. Title 8, CCR, General Industrial Safety Orders (GISO), Section 5156, Scope &
Definitions, and Section 5159, Confined Space Operations.
5. Title 8, CCR, Construction Safety Orders, Section 1532.1, Lead in Construction.
6. Title 8, CCR, Construction Safety Orders, Article 4, Sections 1528 to 1531, Dusts,
Fumes, Mists, Vapor, and Gases.
1.05 WORKER PROTECTION
A. Conform to federal, state, county, city, and Owner safety and environmental protection
codes and regulations. Do not create conditions for which the Owner is subject to
citations by any regulatory agency. Should the Owner be cited for a condition under the
control of the Contractor, the Contractor will be responsible for payment and settlement
of said citation. Provide safety equipment, including that for confined space entry and
safety equipment necessary for use by the Owner’s Representative.
B. Comply with applicable regulations for properly storing, handling, transporting, and
disposing of any hazardous waste.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
C. Provide at least one working telephone on the jobsite at all times.
D. Maintain a full-time standby hole watch in case of an emergency. This employee shall be
certified in CPR, have confined space certification, and be able to comply with GISO
5157 (Operating Procedures and Employee Training) and GISO 5158 (Pre-Entry). This
employee shall also be fully equipped to operate within the directives of GISO 5159
(Confined Space Operations). This person shall have his own personal safety equipment
and operating telephone (not the jobsite telephone).
E. Provide explosionproof artificial lighting for all work-confined spaces. Light bulbs shall
be guarded to prevent breakage. Lighting fixtures and flexible cords shall comply with
the requirements of NEPA 70 NEC for the atmosphere in which they will be used.
F. Coating materials may be irritating to the skin and eyes. When handling and mixing
coatings, workers shall wear gloves and eye shields.
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
A. See Section 099674.
B. The coating applicator shall provide a supervisor at the worksite during cleaning and
coating operations. The supervisor shall have the authority to sign change orders,
coordinate work, and make decisions. Provide skilled craftsmen qualified to perform the
required work.
1.07 INSPECTION
A. The Owner's Representative will provide coating inspection. The Owner’s
Representative will provide test equipment, except for the low-voltage holiday detector.
The Contractor shall conduct the low-voltage holiday test in the presence of the Owner’s
Representative.
B. The Owner's Representative will perform inspection on all phases of the surface
preparation, and application of coating systems. See Section 099674 for additional
requirements.
1.08 FINAL SELECTION OF EXTERIOR COLORS
Color of finish coat shall match the existing color as determined by the Owner.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 COATING SYSTEMS
See Section 099674.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
2.02 INTERIOR COATING SYSTEM
See Section 099674.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF COATING MATERIALS
See Section 099674.
3.02 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
See Section 099674.
3.03 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT
See Section 099674.
3.04 HUMIDITY AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL
See Section 099674.
3.01 HEAVY METAL COMPLIANCE AND TESTING
Comply with requirements of Department of Health Services Title 22 and CAL/OSHA
Title 8 for worker protection during removal of paint and handling of hazardous wastes
resulting from surface contamination and any removed paint particles. Contractor shall
remove existing interior coating and exterior paint where cutting, burning, and welding
will be accomplished. If any additional exterior paint is to be removed, submittal of a
written plan of action for the project shall be accomplished by Contractor prior to start of
project
Paint samples collected from the Edna Tank were tested for lead. The test results are
contained in the Oilfield Environmental Compliance Inc. report dated December 21,
2011 which is located in Appendix D. The Contractor is responsible for conducting any
required testing and conforming to applicable regulations.
The City assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the sampling or test results. All
work involving the removal of lead containing coatings and the disposal of such
removed material shall be in strict accordance with all applicable Local, State and
Federal regulations and guidelines including notification, removal and containment
techniques, proper transportation and disposal, and worker protection and monitoring.
The Contractor is responsible to test the composite waste from the project to determine
proper disposal. A copy of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
For waste requiring the preparation of a hazardous waste manifest and waste shipment
record, the Contractor shall prepare an accurate hazardous waste manifest and waste
shipment record for signing by the Engineer. Neither the Contractor nor his employees
shall sign the waste manifests or waste shipment records as the generator's
representative. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a certified weight ticket
for each shipment of hazardous waste. If any waste is shipped to a disposal facility
outside of California, the transporter and disposal facility shall complete and sign and
distribute California's Hazardous Waste Manifest in the same manner as required by
California law for the disposal facilities inside California.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any cleanup of areas where lead containing
material has been released during the job. The Contractor shall assume all costs for such
cleaning.
3.02 WELDING
A. Review Contractor-certified qualification records of the welders with the Owner's
Representative at the start of the project and each time a new welder is employed.
Provide a record for each welder indicating:
1. Date and result of qualification tests.
2. Contractor conducting tests.
3. Identifying mark of welder.
B. All butt joints require complete joint penetration welds.
C. Do not weld when the temperature is less than 32°F; during rain, snow, or high winds; or
when ice is on the metal. For plate thicknesses in excess of 1 1/2 inches, preheating is
required when the metal temperature is less than 70°F.
3.03 VACUUM TEST
Test for porosity in the welded seams of the tank bottom by observation for bubbles in a
soap solution coating with a glass top metal testing box connected to equipment that
produces a vacuum of at least 2 psi. Correct deficient welds.
3.05 INTERIOR SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove accumulated sand and silt from the bottom of the tank.
3.06 EXTERIOR SURFACE PREPARATION
A. During the surface preparation procedures on the tank exterior roof and shell, protect
workers against lead hazards according to CAL/OSHA Title 8, CCR, Section 1532.1
(Lead in Construction).
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MODIFYING EXISTING STEEL WATER TANK 099672-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099672 - MODIFYING EXISTING
STEEL WATER TANK)
B. Contain paint chips that may be removed and store them in EPA-approved containers for
lead hazardous wastes.
3.07 LIMITATIONS ON THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. See Section 099674.
B. If a change in climatic conditions damages a coating application, repair the damaged
coatings to its specified condition. The Contractor is responsible for damaged coatings.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
See Section 099674.
3.09 INSPECTION FACILITIES
See Section 099674.
3.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. See Section 099674.
B. The Owner’s Representative will provide all test equipment as specified in Section
099674, except for the nondestructive low-voltage holiday detector.
3.11 DISINFECTION
A. See Section 099674.
B. Disinfect the tank with chlorine that conforms to AWWA B300 or B301.
C. Provide Owner's Representative with written test results. Owner will submit results to
Department of Health Services prior to placing tank in service.
3.12 TESTING FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC CONSTITUENTS
See Section 099674.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
SECTION 099674 COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section describes the materials, applications, and inspection of the protective
coatings to be utilized on the interior and exterior surfaces of the steel water tank. Clean
and coat steel water tank in accordance with AWWA D102 and the following. Use a
two-component epoxy on interior surfaces. Use a primer/epoxy
intermediate/polyurethane finish system for the exterior.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Modifying Existing Steel Water Tank: 099672.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit coating manufacturer's catalog data on formulation and recommended use.
C. Submit coating manufacturer's surface preparation recommendations including
maximum height of surface profile on abrasive blast cleaned steel.
D. Submit coating manufacturer's application instructions, equipment, temperature and
humidity limitations, drying time, and recoat cycle time.
E. Submit coating manufacturer's recommended minimum and maximum time intervals
between the application of field-applied primers and the field-applied touch-up or
intermediate coats.
F. Submit two color chip samples illustrating available colors for the finish coats of the
exterior coating system.
G. Submit complete field procedures to be utilized by the tank manufacturer for shop-
primed steel surfaces. Include detailed instructions for degreasing steel prior to blast
cleaning, cleaning of blast particles before recycling, application of primers, curing
period.
H. Submit manufacturer's safety data sheets on painting and coating products.
1.04 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
At least 14 days prior to the shop or field application of the coating systems to the steel
tank, schedule and arrange a conference with the Owner's Representative, tank
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
manufacturer, coating applicator, and the coating manufacturer to coordinate the
following:
A. Tank manufacturer's work schedule for inspection coordination.
B. Surface preparation methods.
C. Specification compliance and surface profile.
D. Schedule of coating application.
E. List of equipment for cleaning and coating applications.
F. Weather limitations for acceptable work.
G. Inspection facilities.
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
The Contractor shall require the coating applicator to hold a valid State of California
Contractor's Class 33 license for performing abrasive blast cleaning and coating/painting
work. The Contractor's coating applicator shall have a minimum of five years'
experience and successful history in the application of the specified products to surfaces
of steel tanks.
1.06 INSPECTION
A. The Owner's Representative will provide a coating inspector. Test equipment will be
provided by the Owner and will be operated by the Owner's Representative assigned to
the project.
B. The Owner's Representative will perform inspection on all on-site phases of the surface
preparation, and application of the coating systems.
1.07 FINAL SELECTION OF EXTERIOR COLORS
The Owner will select three colors from the submitted color chips for the exterior coat.
Apply each of the three selected colors on a prepared 15-square-foot surface of the tank
for final color selection.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 COATING SYSTEMS
A. All materials of a specified system including primer, touch-up, intermediate, and finish
coats shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other
additives shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer for the specified system.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
B. Coating materials, including additives to be used on interior tank surfaces, shall not
contain trichloroethylene (TCE) or tetrachloroethylene (PCE) volatile organic
constituents.
C. No request for product substitution will be considered which decreases the dry-film
thickness designated, the number of coats to be applied, or which changes the generic
type of coating specified.
D. Requests for substitution shall contain the full name of each product, descriptive
literature, complete data on past performance, manufacturer's instruction for use, generic
type, its nonvolatile content by volume, and complete product information as outlined in
AWWA D102. This information shall demonstrate equivalence of product and
performance to the specified materials. No coating materials shall be procured or
delivered to the project site prior to the review of the proposed material by the Owner's
Representative.
2.02 INTERIOR EPOXY COATING SPOT REPAIR SYSTEM
A. Primer: Tnemec POTA-POX PLUS Series N140, 4-6 mils, or approved equal.
B. Intermediate: Tnemec POTA-POX PLUS Series N140, 4-6 mils, or approved equal.
C. Finish: Tnemec POTA-POX PLUS Series N140, 4-6 mils, or approved equal.
EXTERIOR COATING (IOZ/EPOXY/POLYURETHANE)
D. Primer: Carboline Carbomastic 15 aluminum epoxy mastic, 3-5 mils, Devoe 231 epoxy
mastic, aluminum 3-5 mils, Tnemec Series 118 Uni-Bond, 6.0 to 8.0 mils, or approved
equal.
E. Intermediate: Carbomastic 15 aluminum epoxy mastic, 3-5 mils, Devoe 231 epoxy
mastic, aluminum 3-5 mils, Tnemec Series 118 Uni-Bond, 6.0 to 8.0 mils, or approved
equal.
F. Finish: Carboline Carbothane 134 VOC aliphatic acrylic polyurethane, 2-3 mils,
Devoe High Performance Coatings Devthane 378H Aliphatic Urethane Semi-Gloss,
2 - 3 mils, Tnemec Series 1095 Endura-Shield, 2.5 to 4.0 mils, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF COATING MATERIALS
A. Deliver coating materials to the job in original sealed containers identified with labels
indicating manufacturer; product name and number; color, batch, or lot number; and date
of manufacture. Note the date of manufacture and apply coatings prior to the expiration
of the guaranteed storage life. Coating materials exceeding storage life will be rejected.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
B. Store coating materials in enclosed structures to protect from weather and excessive heat
or cold. Conform to state and local requirements for flammable materials.
3.02 PROTECTION OF THE WORK
A. Protect adjacent work and surfaces not to be coated from blast cleaning, overspray,
spattering, and spillage. Use protective coverings or drop cloths. Where protection is
required or provided for coated surface, maintain until the coating has properly cured.
Do not handle, work on, or disturb these areas until the coating is completely dry and
hard.
3.03 CONDITION OF EQUIPMENT
Use coating equipment designed for the application of the specified materials. Use
compressors with traps and filters to remove water and oils from the air.
3.04 VENTILATION OF TANK INTERIOR
Use forced-air ventilation at all times and after the application of the interior coating
systems.
3.05 TANK WASHOUT
A. The tank will be drained by the owner prior to construction. Wash inside surfaces with
low volume, moderate pressure (2,400 psi min) water. Remove and dispose of residual
water and sediment.
3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION PRIOR TO HAND TOOL, POWER TOOL, OR
ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING
A. Remove oil, grease, dust, dirt, rust, moisture, mill scale, and all other foreign or
interference substances that would adversely affect the adhesion or durability of the
coating system.
B. Remove oil and grease in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Use clean cloths and cleaning
solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a film or greasy residue on the
cleaned surfaces.
C. Remove weld spatter and weld slag, and grind smooth rough welds, beads, peaked
corners, and sharp edges, including erection lugs, in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and
SSPC SP-3.
3.07 LIMITATIONS ON THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Do not apply coatings under the following conditions:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
1. When the surrounding ambient air temperature or the temperature of the surface to
be coated is below 50°F or as recommended by the manufacturer of the specified
coating system.
2. When the temperature of the surface to be coated is more than 5°F below the air
temperature or when the surface temperature is over 120°F.
3. When the surface to be coated is wet, moist, or contaminated with any foreign
matter.
4. During rain, snow, fog, or mist or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%.
5. When the surface temperature is less than 5°F above the dew point within eight
hours after application of coating.
B. If above conditions are prevalent, the application of coating shall be delayed or
postponed until conditions are favorable. Dew or moisture condensation should be
anticipated, and if such conditions are prevalent, coating work shall be delayed until
midmorning to be certain that the surfaces are dry. The day's coating shall be completed
in time to permit the film sufficient drying time prior to damage by climatic conditions.
C. Climatic conditions will be monitored by the Owner's Representative utilizing
psychrometers and other measuring gauges at the worksite to aid in inspection.
D. If a change in climatic conditions damages a coating application, repair the damaged
coatings to their specified condition.
3.08 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. Conform to the requirements of SSPC PA-1. Follow the recommendations of the coating
manufacturer including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners,
thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety
precautions.
B. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application.
Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor
workmanship. Finished surfaces shall be free from holidays, defects, or blemishes.
C. Use a different shade or tint on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage.
D. Prior to each coating application, brush coat with the coating material all welds, sharp
edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces difficult to coat to provide complete coverage of
all surfaces.
E. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning is
allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating
material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not flood the
coating material surface with thinner prior to mixing. Do not reduce coating materials
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics and to
obtain the specified dry-film thicknesses.
F. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast-cleaned surfaces by dusting,
sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good
visibility of working area prior to coating applications. Remove dust from coated
surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming prior to applying succeeding coats.
G. Observe minimum and maximum recoat times between primer and succeeding coating
applications to achieve maximum crosslinking of coatings. If the recommended
minimum or maximum recoat time is exceeded, prepare the surface as directed by the
coating manufacturer. Apply a second application of the primer or coating if the
maximum recoat time has been exceeded.
H. Apply coating systems to the specified minimum dry-film thicknesses as measured from
above the peaks of the surface profile. Measurement shall be in accordance with SSPC
PA-2 and shall be corrected for the magnetic effect of the surface profile.
I. Apply primer or touch-up coating immediately after blast cleaning and before any
surface rusting occurs or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Reclean
steel surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become moist prior to
coating application.
3.09 TANK SURFACES TO RECEIVE COATINGS
A. Bare steel surfaces due to cutting of roof plate at new roof vent openings and at aerator
mooring holes.
B. Top surface of roof plates inside new ventilator support curbs.
C. Inside surfaces of new ventilator support curbs.
D. Exterior surfaces of new ventilator support curbs.
E. Interior submerged surfaces at the Edna Saddle Tank that are affected by the work, such
as new 316 stainless steel ladder, new ladder supports, areas where existing ladder
supports are removed, and coating repairs in areas affected by welding activities.
F. Exterior coating repair in weld areas at the Edna Saddle Tank.
3.10 APPLICATION OF INTERIOR COATING SYSTEM
A. Spot clean interior tank surfaces and exposed steel in new openings per SSPC SP-11
Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal and the coating manufacturer’s recommendation.
The surface profile shall be per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Feather all edges
to tightly adhered base coat.
Coat with Interior Epoxy Coating System.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
B. Shop blast new steel interior ladder legs and connection appurtenances in accordance
with SSPC SP-10.
Shop coat with Interior Epoxy Coating System.
C. Clean top of existing roof plates to be enclosed by new power vent support curb per
SSPC SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal and the coating manufacturer’s
recommendation. The surface profile shall be per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Coat with Interior Epoxy Coating System.
D. Shop blast interior surfaces of new ventilator support curbs in accordance with SSPC
SP-10.
Shop apply Interior Epoxy Coating System.
3.11 APPLICATION OF EXTERIOR COATING SYSTEM
A. Clean exterior weld repair areas Edna Saddle Tank per SSPC SP-11 Power Tool
Cleaning to Bare Metal and the coating manufacturer’s recommendation. The surface
profile shall be per the manufacturer’s recommendations. See S-201.
Coat with Exterior Epoxy Coating System.
B. Shop blast exterior surfaces of new ventilator support curbs in accordance with SSPC
SP-10.
Shop apply Exterior Epoxy Coating System.
3.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Owner's Representative will perform such tests as are required to demonstrate
substantial compliance with all phases of the surface preparation, abrasive blast cleaning,
and application of the coating systems. Test equipment shall include but not be limited to
the following: SSPC surface preparation standards, surface profile comparator, test tape,
micrometer, abrasive sieve test, ultraviolet lamp, mirror, certified thickness calibration
plates, magnetic-type dry-film thickness gauge, nondestructive holiday detector, and
nonsudsing-type wetting agent. Equipment will be calibrated by the Owner's
Representative in the presence of the Contractor to verify its accuracy prior to use. The
Owner will provide the test equipment.
B. Notify the Owner's Representative three working days in advance of shop and field
operations involving abrasive blast cleaning and coating applications.
C. The Owner's Representative will verify the degree of surface cleanliness profile of the
shop and field blast cleaned surface. Perform additional blast cleaning over areas not
conforming to the specified surface preparation.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-8
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
D. The Owner's Representative will inspect each coat of primer, touch-up, intermediate, and
finish coating to determine thickness and integrity. Each coating application will be
checked and deficiencies marked. After observing specified recoat time, apply additional
coating materials over areas not having the specified minimum dry-film thickness and
areas having any holidays or pinholes. After correction of deficiencies, the Owner's
Representative will reinspect those areas to determine the acceptability of the additional
coating. Each coating application must be 100% to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative prior to succeeding coating applications.
3.13 DISINFECTION
A. Disinfect the interior surfaces of the tank after the finish coat of the interior coating
system has dried and cured. Observe the manufacturer's recommendations of the
specified coating system for ventilation requirements and time interval for complete
drying.
B. Prior to disinfection, remove all scaffolding, planks, tools, rags, and other material not a
permanent part of the tank. Thoroughly flush the inlet and outlet piping with potable
water. Use a high-pressure water blaster and wash interior surfaces of the tank with
potable water. Drain and squeegee water, dirt, and foreign material accumulated in this
cleaning operation from the tank.
C. Disinfect the tank by chlorination in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C652
Method 1. Use sodium hypochlorite solution as the available form of chlorine.. Spray a
chlorine solution having a chlorine content of 300 mg/L on the interior surfaces to be in
contact with water when the tank is put into service. Do not drain the used chlorine
solution from the tank during the spraying operation.
D. At the completion of disinfection, partially fill the tank with water to a depth of 1 foot
and retain for four hours minimum. After the four-hour period, drain and squeegee
chlorinated water from the tank. Rinse with potable water.
E. Discharge of chlorinated water into watercourses or surface waters is regulated by the
NPDES. Prior to discharge, review with the Owner the location and rate of flow of
discharge. Apply a reducing agent to the water to be wasted to neutralize thoroughly the
chlorine residual remaining in the water. See AWWA C652, Appendix B for
neutralizing chemicals.
F. Potable water necessary for the wash down, disinfection, and rinse will be provided by
the Owner. The Contractor shall make all connections to the Owner-installed meter and
reduced-pressure backflow prevention device. The Owner will fill the tank with potable
water to the overflow level after the Contractor has completed the disinfection operation.
G. After the tank has been filled to the overflow level, the Owner's Representative will take
water samples from the tank for bacteriological testing. If the testing procedure shows
the presence of coliform bacteria, provide additional chlorination of the water in the tank
and retest at the Contractor's expense. Continue disinfecting and retesting until
satisfactory results are achieved.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COATINGS FOR STEEL WATER TANK 099674-9
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099674 - COATINGS FOR STEEL
WATER TANK)
3.14 TESTING FOR VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
A. Testing for volatile organic compounds is not required.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING 099752-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099752 - COLD-APPLIED WAX
TAPE)
SECTION 099752 COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and application of a three-part, cold-applied wax tape
coating system for buried piping per NACE RP0375-2006, Section 4 except as modified
herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Polyethylene Sheet Encasement (AWWA C105): 099754.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data sheets and application instructions.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PRIMER
A. Primer shall be a blend of petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors having a
paste-like consistency. The primer shall comply with NACE RP0375-2006 and shall
have the following properties:
1. Pour Point: 100°F to 110°F.
2. Flash Point: 350°F.
3. Coverage: 1 gallon per 100 square feet.
B. Primer shall be Trenton Wax Tape Primer, Denso Paste Primer, or equal.
2.02 WAX TAPE
A. Wax tape shall consist of a synthetic-fiber felt, saturated with a blend of microcrystalline
wax, petrolatums, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors, forming a tape coating that is
easily formable over irregular surfaces. The tape shall comply with NACE RP0375-2006
and shall have the following properties:
1. Saturant Pour Point: 115°F to 120°F.
2. Thickness: 50 to 70 mils.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING 099752-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099752 - COLD-APPLIED WAX
TAPE)
3. Tape Width: 6 inches.
B. Wax tapes used for pipe soil-to-air transitions shall be UV light stable so as not to
degrade in the presence of sunlight.
C. Wax tape shall be Trenton No. 1 Wax Tape, Denso "Densyl Tape," or equal.
2.03 PLASTIC WRAPPER
A. Wrapper shall be a polyvinylidene chloride plastic with three 50-gauge plies wound
together as a single sheet. The wrapper shall have the following properties:
1. Color: Clear.
2. Thickness: 1.5 mils.
3. Tape Width: 6 inches.
B. Plastic wrapper shall be Trenton Poly-Ply, Denso Tape PVC Self-Adhesive, or equal.
2.04 POLYETHYLENE SHEET COATING
See Section 099754.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WAX TAPE COATING APPLICATION
A. Surfaces shall be clean and free of dirt, grease, water, and other foreign material prior to
the application of the primer and wax tape.
B. Apply primer by hand or brush to fitting surfaces. Work the primer into crevices and
completely cover exposed metal surfaces.
C. Apply the wax tape immediately after the primer application. Work the tape into the
crevices around fittings. Apply the wax tape by pressing and molding the tape into
conformity with the surface so that it does not bridge over irregular surfaces
configurations. Begin wrapping approximately 3 inches behind the area to be wrapped.
If starting at a straight edge, wrap the tape spirally around the pipe while touching the
end edge before starting the angle to begin the spiral. If the previous roll is headed in a
downward direction, tuck the next roll under the previous roll. Stretch each roll tight as
wrapping continues to avoid air bubbles.
D. Wrap the wax tape spirally around the pipe and across the fitting. Use a minimum
overlap of 50% of the tape width. Apply tape to flanges, mechanical and restrained joint
bolts, nuts and glands, and grooved-end couplings to 6 inches beyond each side of the
item.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
COLD-APPLIED WAX TAPE COATING 099752-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099752 - COLD-APPLIED WAX
TAPE)
E. Work the tape into the crevices and contours of irregularly shaped surfaces and smooth
out so that there is a continuous protective layer with no voids or spaces under the tape.
F. After application, seal the overlap seams of the tape by hand by tapering and pressing
the seam, attempting to create a continuous surface. There shall be no air pockets
underneath the tape. The tape shall have direct intimate contact with the pipe surface.
G. On vertical sections of the piping, such as at pipe-to-soil transitions, wrap the pipe
starting from the bottom and proceeding upward so that downward flowing water and
backfill do not catch in a seam.
H. Overwrap the completed wax tape installation with the plastic wrapping material. Wrap
spirally around the pipe and across the fitting. Use a minimum overlap of 55% of the
tape width and apply two layers or applications of overwrap. Secure plastic wrapper to
pipe with adhesive tape.
3.02 APPLICATION OF POLYETHYLENE SHEET COATING TO BURIED PIPING
Wrap completed wax tape coating system with polyethylene film per Section 099754
and secure around the adjacent pipe circumference with adhesive tape.
3.03 HANDLING AND INSTALLING WAX-TAPE COATED PIPE
A. Handle pipe in a manner to minimize damage to the coating. Equipment used for the
handling of coated pipe shall be designed and constructed to avoid damaging the
protective coating system. Inspect supported areas of the pipe prior to installation.
Repair damaged areas before installation.
B. The pipeline trench shall be free of rocks, foreign matter, and projections that could
damage the coating system.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
POLYETHYLENE SHEET ENCASEMENT (AWWA C105) 099754-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099754 - POLYETHYLENE SHEET
ENCASEMENT)
SECTION 099754 POLYETHYLENE SHEET ENCASEMENT (AWWA C105)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and installation of a polyethylene sheet encasement for
buried steel and iron pipe, fittings, and valves.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Cold-Applied Wax Tape Coating: 099752.
B. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting: 312316.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Flexible Pipe Couplings and Expansion Joints: 400722.
E. PVC Distribution Pipe (14 Inches and Larger): 402093.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature and product data sheets describing the physical,
chemical, and electrical properties of the encasement material.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 POLYETHYLENE WRAP
A. The encasement shall consist of low-density polyethylene wrap of at least 8-mil
thickness conforming to AWWA C105. Color: Blue.
B. Polyethylene encasement for ductile-iron pipe shall be supplied as a flat tube meeting the
dimensions of Table 1 in AWWA C105 and shall be supplied by the ductile-iron pipe
manufacturer.
2.02 PLASTIC ADHESIVE TAPE
A. Tape shall consist of polyolefin backing and adhesive which bonds to common pipeline
coatings including polyethylene.
B. Minimum Width: 2 inches.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
POLYETHYLENE SHEET ENCASEMENT (AWWA C105) 099754-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099754 - POLYETHYLENE SHEET
ENCASEMENT)
C. Products: Canusa Wrapid Tape; Tapecoat 35; Polyken 934; AA Thread Seal Tape, Inc.;
or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION OF MOLDABLE MASTIC FILLER TO IRREGULAR ADJACENT
SURFACES
When the adjacent joints are bell-and-spigot or mechanical joints and any associated
welding specifications do not require an external full fillet weld, apply a moldable
mastic filler (per Section 400500) at the step-down area prior to the application of the
sheet encasement and tape.
3.02 APPLYING SHEET COATING TO BURIED PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Apply wrapping per AWWA C105 as modified herein.
B. Apply a double wrapping.
C. Install the polyethylene to completely encase the pipe and fittings to provide a watertight
corrosion barrier. Continuously secure overlaps and ends of sheet and tube with
polyethylene tape. Make circumferential seams with two complete wraps, with no
exposed edges. Tape longitudinal seams and longitudinal overlaps, extending tape
beyond and beneath circumferential seams.
D. Wrap bell-spigot interfaces, restrained joint components, and other irregular surfaces
with wax tape or moldable sealant prior to placing polyethylene encasement.
E. Minimize voids beneath polyethylene. Place circumferential or spiral wraps of
polyethylene tape at 2-foot intervals along the barrel of the pipe to minimize the space
between the pipe and the polyethylene.
F. Overlap adjoining polyethylene tube coatings a minimum of 1 foot and wrap prior to
placing concrete anchors, collars, supports, or thrust blocks. Hand wrap the polyethylene
sheet, apply two complete wraps with no exposed edges to provide a watertight
corrosion barrier, and secure in place with 2-inch-wide plastic adhesive tape.
3.03 APPLYING SHEET COATING TO BURIED FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Wrap irregular surfaces with wax tape or moldable sealant. Press tightly into place
leaving no voids underneath and a smooth surface under coating for polyethylene sheet.
B. Apply two layers or wraps around the coupling. Overlap the adjoining pipe or fitting a
minimum of 1 foot and secure in place with tape. Provide sufficient slack in
polyethylene to allow backfill to be placed around fitting without tearing polyethylene.
Apply tape around the entire circumference of the overlapped section on the adjoining
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
POLYETHYLENE SHEET ENCASEMENT (AWWA C105) 099754-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099754 - POLYETHYLENE SHEET
ENCASEMENT)
pipe or fitting in two complete wraps, with no exposed edges, to provide a watertight
corrosion barrier.
3.04 REPAIR OF POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL
Repair polyethylene material that is damaged during installation. Use polyethylene
sheet, place over damaged or torn area, and secure in place with 2-inch-wide plastic
adhesive tape.
3.05 APPLYING SHEET COATING TO EXISTING BURIED PIPING
When connecting polyethylene-encased pipe or fittings to existing pipe, expose existing
pipe, thoroughly clean the surface, and securely tape the end of the polyethylene to the
existing as specified above. When the existing pipe is polyethylene encased, wrap new
polyethylene encasement over the existing, with overlap of at least 2 feet. Tape securely
as specified above.
3.06 BACKFILL FOR POLYETHYLENE-WRAPPED PIPE, VALVES, AND FITTINGS
Place sand backfill within 1 foot of the pipe, valves, and fittings wrapped with
polyethylene encasement per Section 312316.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS 099761-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099761 - FBE)
SECTION 099761 FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, application, and testing of one-part, fusion-bonded, heat-
cured, thermosetting, 100% solids epoxy linings and coatings on steel, cast-iron, and
ductile-iron equipment, such as valves, flexible pipe couplings, structural steel, and steel
pipe.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Flexible Pipe Couplings and Expansion Joints: 400722.
C. Fusion Bonded Epoxy Lined and Coated Steel Pipe: 402057
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog literature and product data sheets, describing the physical
and chemical properties of the epoxy coating. Describe application and curing
procedure.
C. Submit coating application test records for measuring coating thickness and holiday
detection for each item or pipe section and fitting. Describe repair procedures used.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SURFACES
A. The Contractor shall require the equipment suppliers to provide equipment that is free of
salts, oil, and grease to the coating applicator.
B. The Contractor shall require pipe suppliers to provide bare pipe that is free of salts, oil,
and grease to the coating applicator.
2.02 SHOP-APPLIED EPOXY LINING AND COATING
Lining and coating shall be a 100% solids, thermosetting, fusion-bonded, dry powder
epoxy resin: Scotchkote 134 or 206N, Valspar "Pipeclad 2000," or equal. Epoxy lining
and coating shall meet or exceed the following requirements:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS 099761-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099761 - FBE)
Hardness (minimum) Barcol 17 (ASTM D2583)
Rockwell 50 ("M" scale)
Abrasion resistance
(maximum value)
1,000 cycles: 0.05 gram removed
5,000 cycles: 0.115 gram removed
ASTM D1044, Tabor CS 17 wheel, 1,000-gram
weight
Adhesion (minimum) 3,000 psi (Elcometer)
Tensile strength 7,300 psi (ASTM D2370)
Penetration 0 mil (ASTM G17)
Adhesion overlap shear, 1/8-
inch steel panel, 0.010 glue
line
4,300 psi, ASTM D1002
Impact (minimum value) 100 inch-pounds (Gardner 5/8-inch diameter tup)
2.03 FIELD-APPLIED EPOXY COATING FOR PATCHING
Use a minimum 80% solids liquid epoxy resin, such as Scotchkote 306 or 323.
2.04 PAINTING AND COATING OF GROOVED-END AND FLEXIBLE PIPE
COUPLINGS
Line and coat couplings the same as the pipe. Color shall match the color of the pipe
fusion epoxy coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHOP APPLICATION OF FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LINING AND COATING--
GENERAL
A. Grind surface irregularities, welds, and weld spatter smooth before applying the epoxy.
The allowable grind area shall not exceed 0.25 square foot per location, and the
maximum total grind area shall not exceed 1 square foot per item or piece of equipment.
Do not use any item, pipe, or piece of equipment in which these requirements cannot be
met.
B. Remove surface imperfections, such as slivers, scales, burrs, weld spatter, and gouges.
Grind outside sharp corners, such as the outside edges of flanges, to a minimum radius
of 1/4 inch.
C. Uniformly preheat the pipe, item, or piece of equipment prior to blast cleaning to remove
moisture from the surface. The preheat shall be sufficient to ensure that the surface
temperature is at least 5°F above the dew point temperature during blast cleaning and
inspection.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS 099761-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099761 - FBE)
D. Sandblast surfaces per SSPC SP-5. Protect beveled pipe ends from the abrasive blast
cleaning.
E. Apply lining and coating by the electrostatic spray or fluidized bed process. Minimum
thickness of lining or coating shall be 15 mils. Heat and cure per the epoxy
manufacturer's recommendations. The heat source shall not leave a residue or
contaminant on the metal surface. Do not allow oxidation of surfaces to occur prior to
coating. Do not permit surfaces to flash rust before coating.
3.02 SHOP APPLICATION OF FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LINING AND COATING TO
PIPE--ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply lining and coating per AWWA C213 except as modified herein.
B. Grind 0.020 inch (minimum) off the weld caps on the pipe weld seams before beginning
the surface preparation and heating of the pipe.
3.03 SHOP APPLICATION OF FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LINING AND COATING TO
JOINT AREAS OF DUCTILE-IRON AND CAST-IRON FITTINGS--ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS
Limit the protective coating thickness in the joints of ductile-iron and cast-iron fittings to
maintain a leak-proof joint. However, the coating thickness in the joint area shall not be
less than 4 mils.
3.04 QUALITY OF LINING AND COATING APPLICATIONS
The cured lining or coating shall be smooth and glossy, with no graininess or roughness.
The lining or coating shall have no blisters, cracks, bubbles, underfilm voids, mechanical
damage, discontinuities, or holidays.
3.05 FACTORY TESTING OF COATING--GENERAL
A. Test linings and coatings with a low-voltage wet sponge holiday detector. Test pipe
linings and coatings per AWWA C213, Section 5.3.3. If the number of holidays or
pinholes is fewer than one per 20 square feet of coating surface, repair the holidays and
pinholes by applying the coating manufacturer's recommended patching compound to
each holiday or pinhole and retest. If the number of pinholes and holidays exceeds one
per 20 square feet of coating surface, remove the entire lining or coating and recoat the
item or pipe.
B. Measure the coating thickness at three locations on each item or piece of equipment or
pipe section using a coating thickness gauge calibrated at least once per eight-hour shift.
Record each measured thickness value. Where individual measured thickness values are
less than the specified minimum thickness, measure the coating thickness at three
additional points around the defective area. The average of these measurements shall
exceed the specified minimum thickness value, and no individual thickness value shall
be more than 2 mils below or 3 mils above the specified minimum value. If a section of
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS 099761-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099761 - FBE)
the pipe, item, or piece of equipment does not meet these criteria, remove the entire
lining or coating and recoat the entire item or piece of equipment.
3.06 FACTORY INSPECTION OF LINING AND COATING OF PIPE--ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS
Check for coating defects on the weld seam centerlines. There shall be no porous
blisters, craters, or pimples lying along the peak of the weld crown.
3.07 SHIPPING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When loading piping, fittings, couplings, or other coated items for shipment to the
project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate pipes or other coated
items to prevent damaging the coated surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood
spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the coated surfaces after
separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded pipe or other coated
items and minimize damage.
B. Do not load or unload pipe, fittings, couplings, or other coated items by inserting forklift
tines or lifting chains inside the pipe or item. Use nonmetallic slings, padded chains, or
padded forklift tines to lift pipe or other coated items.
C. Cover piping or other coated items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to
prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.
D. Provide stulls, braces, and supports for piping during shipping and storage such that out-
of-roundness or deflection does not exceed 0.5% of the pipe diameter.
E. Handle piping and other coated items with care during the unloading, installation, and
erection operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store pipe or other coated items
on the ground or on top of other work unless ground or work is covered with a protective
covering or tarpaulin. Place pipe or other coated items above the ground upon platforms,
skids, or other supports.
F. Store piping or other coated items at the site on pallets to prevent direct contact with
ground or floor. Cover pipe or coated items during storage with protective coverings or
tarpaulins to prevent deposition of rainwater, salt air, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
G. Do not allow piping or other coated items to contact metal, concrete, or other surfaces
during storage, handling, or installation and erection at the site that could damage or
scratch the coating.
3.08 FIELD REPAIRS
Patch scratches and damaged areas incurred while installing fusion-bonded epoxy coated
items with a two-component, 80% solids (minimum), liquid epoxy resin. Wire brush or
sandblast the damaged areas per SSPC SP-10. Lightly abrade or sandblast the coating or
lining on the sides of the damaged area before applying the liquid epoxy coating. Apply
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION-BONDED EPOXY LININGS AND COATINGS 099761-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S099761 - FBE)
an epoxy coating to defective linings and coatings to areas smaller than 20 square inches.
Patched areas shall overlap the parent or base coating a minimum of 0.5 inch. If a
defective area exceeds 20 square inches, remove the entire lining and coating and recoat
the entire item or piece of equipment. Apply the liquid epoxy coating to a minimum dry-
film thickness of 15 mils.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260101-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260101 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, make operable and test all electrical
equipment and other systems with electrical connections shown on the Drawings or
called for in the Specifications or in Change Orders. In connection therewith, the
Contractor shall also furnish and install all necessary devices, switches, circuit breakers,
hardware and systems required to make said equipment properly and safely operable
including, but not limited to, mounting hardware, framing, and electrical circuits.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All new electrical work associated with the installation of the screw press, including
control connection to the existing Gravity Belt Thickener control panel.
B. All luminaires, mounting provisions, backing, accessories, switches, receptacles,
faceplates, photoelectric controls, and all necessary appurtenances for a complete
lighting and receptacle layout.
C. Grounding of equipment, services, and neutrals as indicated and/or required and as
indicated on Drawings.
D. Electrical work and equipment for connection of equipment as specified herein and/or
shown on Drawings.
E. Electrical rough-in and connections of equipment furnished under other Divisions of the
work or as required.
F. All cutting, excavation, backfill, conduit encasement, and restoration of disturbed
surfaces required in conjunction with the electrical work.
G. Core drilling, conduit sleeves, sealing and waterproofing, metal frames, backings,
equipment bracing, and supports required for installation of electrical conduits, fixtures,
and equipment not specified elsewhere.
H. Prime painting of electrical surfaces requiring finish painting.
I. Miscellaneous systems and equipment as hereinafter specified, as shown on Drawings,
or as required.
J. Submittals, completion data, tests, identifications, record drawings, maintenance and
operating instructions, and warranties.
K. The word "provide" means: "To furnish, install, and electrically connect under this
Division of the work."
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260101-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
1.03 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins for each device and equipment with field
measurements and with the requirements of the actual device or piece of equipment to be
connected,
B. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for rough-in requirements.
1.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with all other components.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. The Drawings serve as working drawings
only, indicating diagrammatically the general layout of the systems and their various
components and equipment.
C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the Work.
E. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of
disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
F. American National Standards Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Installation
Standards NECA 1-2010 'Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical
Contracting' as published by the National Electrical Contractors Association.
1.05 INTERRUPTIONS OF EXISTING SERVICES
A. Interruption of electrical utilities considered to be "critical" by the Owner shall be
performed only at times approved by them during the hours from 12:00 midnight to 4:00
a.m. with a maximum down time not to exceed four (4) hours. Shutdowns considered
non-critical may be performed during normal working hours at times and of durations
approved by Owner, unless noted otherwise.
B. At the time of any interruption or cut-off, have adequate materials and labor readily
available so that the Work can be completed without delay and within the approved
schedule. Include all required temporary services to maintain power, alarm, and signal
to areas where these systems cannot be interrupted at any time. Refer to notes on
Drawings for additional requirements.
1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Do all miscellaneous cutting, drilling, and patching necessary and normally required at
the time of actually installing this work. Patching shall be of the same materials,
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260101-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
workmanship, and finish as the original or surrounding work to the complete satisfaction
of the Owner's Representative. Seal all voids or spaces around penetrations with dry-
pack, waterproof mastic grout, escutcheons, or collars. Do not cut structural framing,
walls, floors, decks and other members intended to withstand stress, except with Owner's
Representative written authorization. Authorization shall be granted only where there is
no other reasonable method for completing electrical work and where proposed cutting
is approved by Owner's Representative and clearly does not weaken the structure.
B. Core Drilling Concrete: Where authorized, cut openings through concrete (for conduit
penetrations and similar services) by core drilling. Do not cut by hammer-driven chisel
or drill. Use ground penetrating radar to locate structural steel prior to drilling. Avoid
cutting reinforcing steel.
C. All costs required to accomplish cutting, repairing, sealing, and firestopping of new
work in existing areas to accommodate the electrical work shall be paid for by the
Contractor at no increase in contract cost.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide minimum one electronic copy in text searchable PDF compatible format for
each submittal.
B. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications. Refer
to subsequent sections for specific submittal requirements.
C. Submittals for electrical equipment shall include manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General Provisions) and Division 1 for
substitution requirements.
1.09 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to the Division 1 for requirements. The following paragraphs supplement the
requirements of Division 1.
B. Obtain from the Owner's Representative at cost a complete set of applicable bond prints.
On these systematically and accurately keep an up-to-date and legible dimensional
record of all work installed differently from the location or manner indicated by the
Drawings, as well as exact conduit routing, locations of stub-outs, and hidden or
underground features. Locate dimensionally to permanent points of reference. Have
these Drawings readily available for reference and review. When job status permits,
submit to the Owner and then amend and/or correct and resubmit if requested.
C. When the above information is complete and acceptable to the Owner, obtain scanned
documents in pdf format and submit for final review. .
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260101-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
D. The record drawing information procedure outlined under Paragraph B above shall be
coordinated with and reviewed by the Owner's full-time Inspector during the course of
construction and shall have his signed approval before submission to the Owner.
E. Mark Specifications to indicate any approved substitutions, Change Orders, actual
equipment, and materials used. This data shall be included with submittals.
1.10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Refer to the Division 1 Operation and Maintenance Data for procedures and
requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals. Refer to the
Division 1 Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials for requirements pertaining to spare
parts.
B. Operating Instructions: In addition to the information required by Division 1 for
Maintenance Data, include written instructions by manufacturer, fabricator, or installer
of equipment or systems, detailing procedures to be followed by Owner in operation,
control, shut-down, and testing of each operating item of the equipment and each
electrical system.
C. Maintenance Manuals: In addition to the information required by Division 1 for
Maintenance Data, compile information provided for Owner's maintenance of each
system of operating equipment, including wiring and control wiring diagrams,
lubrication, emergency control, parts replacement, spare parts inventory
recommendation, listing of tools and accessories needed for maintenance, and similar
instructions.
1.11 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Follow manufacturer's directions and recommendations in all cases where the
manufacturers of articles used for this work furnish directions covering points not shown
or specified.
B. Delivery, storage, and handling: Deliver equipment in containers, sections or lengths that
can be moved past obstructions in delivery path. Store equipment indoors in clean dry
space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect from exposure to dirt,
fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
1.12 MARKING
A. In general, and except as modified by details or elsewhere herein, before requesting the
Engineer to make final observation, identify all electrical distribution equipment, circuit
breakers, and other equipment by means of neat, approved labels, decals, brass tags,
engraved plastic laminate or metal strips, neatly painted signs or by other approved
means. Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor
markers of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered plastic coated type or write-on type
with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap, numbered to show circuit identification.
Where nameplates are indicated, provide engraving stock plastic laminate, complying
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260101-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
with FS L-P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard
letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white core plies (letter color).
Provide thickness of 1/16", except as otherwise indicated. Punch plastic laminate for
mechanical fastening and provide stainless steel rivets or self-tapping stainless steel
screws.
1.13 MOUNTING
A. Provide all materials and accessories necessary to properly mount and secure equipment
furnished and/or installed under the electrical work in compliance with all applicable
codes and authorities.
B. Seismic restraints and anchorage for equipment shall comply with the requirements of
2016 edition of Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Chapter 16, Section 1613.
1.14 TESTS
A. Perform all electrical tests as required or as directed. Provide all materials, labor, and
equipment necessary for performance of these tests and at completion of the work
perform a complete "in-service" operation of the entire electrical lighting, power, signal,
communications, and alarm systems to show compliance with the Drawings and
Specifications. Replace any work showing faults under tests without additional cost to
the Owner.
B. Where NETA electrical tests are indicated, testing shall be performed in accordance with
NETA ATS-2009 (International Electrical Testing Association) - Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1.15 CLEANING
A. During construction and upon completion of the work, remove from the site all debris
and excess materials, tools, scaffolding, etc., resulting from this work. Clean all
equipment, including luminaires, distribution and control equipment, and enclosures,
free from dust, dirt, grease, paint, etc.
PART 2 - MATERIALS [NOT USED]
PART 3 - EXECUTION [NOT USED]
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
600V WIRES AND CABLES 260519-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260519 600V WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Types of wire and cable in this section include conductors having insulation rated for use
on power systems with voltages of not more than 600 volts, nominal.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire and cable
products of types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than five years.
B. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association
standards pertaining to materials, construction, and testing of wire, cable, and
accessories.
C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical wires, cables, and accessories and provide
products and components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or
equal.
D. ANSI/ASTM: Comply with ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire
and cable.
E. IEEE Compliance: Comply with IEEE standards pertaining to wire and cable.
F. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with CEC as applicable to
construction and installation of electrical wire, cable and accessories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on 600 volt wire and cable, and accessories.
Include data confirming the listing of single terminals, lugs, or connectors and
identifying the maximum size and quantity of conductors to be terminated.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
600V WIRES AND CABLES 260519-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. 600 Volt Wire and Cable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are
not limited to BICC, General Cable, Southwire, or equal.
B. Accessories Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to
AMP Products Corp., Burndy Corp., Ideal Industries, Inc., Penn-Union Co., Reliable
Electric Co., Thomas and Betts Corp, 3M, or equal.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide wire and cable of manufacturer's standard
materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as
recommended by manufacturer, and as required for the installation.
B. Provide new wire and cable in unbroken reels or containers of recent manufacture
bearing NRTL Label, manufacturer's trademark, and type and size of wire or cable.
C. Provide electrical accessories as recommended by connector and terminal manufacturer
for intended applications.
2.03 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 600 volt insulated soft-drawn copper and minimum
12 AWG unless otherwise indicated. Conductors shall be Type THWN/THHN gasoline
and oil resistant. Conductors shall be annealed copper, insulated with flame retardant,
moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic, jacketed with abrasion, moisture, gasoline, and
oil resistant nylon. Comply with CEC and the following for color coding of conductors.
Color code all secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors. 240 volt system
neutrals shall be white. 240 volt ungrounded conductors for phase A, phase B, and
phase C shall be black, red, and blue respectively. 480 volt ungrounded conductors for
phase A, phase B, and Phase C shall be brown, orange, and yellow, respectively. Where
240 volt system neutrals and 480 volt system neutrals are located within the same
enclosure, provide a yellow stripe on the 480 volt system neutral. The color coding for
conductors 6 AWG and smaller shall be continuous along the entire length.
B. Provide solid or stranded conductors for sizes smaller than 8 AWG. Provide stranded
conductors for sizes 8 AWG and larger.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, solder,
electrical soldering flux, wire nuts, and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
600V WIRES AND CABLES 260519-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
manufacturers for type services indicated. Splices in wet locations shall be suitable for
continuous operation under water.
B. Use compression type connectors for all taps, joints, and splices. Solderless connectors
may be used for conductors smaller than 8 AWG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install electrical wires and cables where indicated, in compliance with this specification
and according to manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices.
B. Install all wiring in conduit unless otherwise noted.
C. Complete all work that may cause wire and cable damage before pulling into conduit.
Provide sufficient slack at the terminations to allow for proper connections.
D. Group all communication conductors and power conductors that are smaller than 2/0
AWG in panelboards, cabinets, pull boxes, and switchboard wireways; tie with plastic
ties; and fan out to terminals.
E. Wires and cables shall be lubricated with an NRTL listed commercial lubricant while
they are being pulled. Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable
manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum allowable pulling
force.
F. Where connections are made in underground structures or in junction boxes in wet
locations, make completely watertight. Install cables in underground structures with the
longest route parallel to the walls.
G. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.
The stripped length of bare conductor shall not be longer than required for the terminal,
lug, or connector. Ensure all strands of each conductor are secured under the terminal,
lug, or connector.
H. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection,
testing, and maintenance.
I. Connect electrical wire and cable to equipment wire and cable in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible,
mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between
electrical power supplies and installed equipment.
J. Refer to Division 26 "Electrical Identification" section for identification of electrical
power supply conductor terminations with markers approved by Engineer as to types,
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
600V WIRES AND CABLES 260519-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
colors, letter sizes, and marker sizes. Affix markers at each point of termination as close
as possible to each point of connection.
K. Make conductors continuous between outlets or junction boxes. Make up splices only in
junction boxes, outlet boxes, auxiliary gutters, or underground structures. Splices and
taps shall have mechanical strength and insulation equivalent or greater than the
conductor material.
L. Tighten pressure type lugs on panels and equipment and then re-tighten 24 hours or
more later.
M. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Insulation resistance tests: Test each complete circuit prior to energizing. Insulation
resistance between conductors and between each conductor and ground shall not be less
than 25 megohms. Repair or replace wires or cables in circuits and repeat the test.
B. Before energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and for short circuits.
Correct malfunctions when detected, at no additional cost to Owner.
C. After wire and cable hookups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning of each
system in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by Drawings. Types of grounding specified in
this section include solid grounding.
B. Applications of grounding work in this section include underground metal water piping,
grounding electrodes, building frames, enclosures, equipment, neutrals, raceways,
devices, and outlet, junction, and pull boxes.
C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in
these specifications and shown on drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors,
terminals, and fittings of types and ratings required and of ancillary grounding materials,
including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, and ground rods, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding and provide
products and components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or
equal. Comply with requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to
electrical grounding and bonding.California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance:
C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with requirements of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141, and 142
pertaining to electrical grounding.
D. Comply with CEC requirements as to materials and installation of electrical grounding
systems, associated equipment, and wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding systems and accessories.
Submit installation instructions from the manufacturer of the exothermically welded
connections.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering grounding products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
limited to, Burndy Corp., General Electrical Supply Co., Ideal Industries, Inc., Thomas
and Betts Corp., and O-Z Gedney Div; General Signal Corp.
2.02 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated,
with assembly of materials including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors,
terminals (solderless lugs), grounding buses in distribution equipment and panelboards,
and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type
unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or
components are not indicated, provide products complying with CEC, IEEE, and
established industry standards for applications indicated.
B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for
grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to
CEC.
C. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30-gage bare copper wires
and properly sized for indicated applications.
D. Flexible Jumper Strap: Flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30-gage bare copper wire;
3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long; 48,250 cm. Select braid with holes sized for 3/8" diameter bolts,
and protect braid with copper bolt hole ends.
E. Grounding Rod Electrodes: Steel with copper clad welded exterior, 3/4” diameter x 10'.
F. UFER Grounds: Bare stranded copper conductor of AWG and minimum lengths
indicated, encased within footings and foundations three inches above bottom.
Grounding conductor electrodes shall be exothermically welded together and to ground
rods.
G. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-
shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, and bonding straps, as recommended by
accessories manufacturers for type of service indicated.
H. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of
welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Provide welded connections
where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding rods/electrodes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
A. General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with
applicable portions of CEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical
grounding and bonding system work with other work. Install clamp-on connectors only
on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and
circuit integrity.
C. Ground electrical service system neutral at new service and to grounding electrodes.
D. Raceway grounding: Provide code size insulated equipment grounding conductor in all
raceways.
E. Connect and bond equipment ground bus, panelboard, exposed non-current-carrying
metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in
raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and piping systems.
F. Grounding electrode connections shall be exothermically welded, unless otherwise
noted.
G. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts,
according to manufacturers' published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.
Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to
comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounding.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of each electrical system ground, test ground resistance
with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms,
take appropriate action, at no additional costs to Owner, to reduce resistance to 5 ohms
or less, by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling
ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260529 SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by Drawings and schedules
and/or specified in other Division 26 sections.
B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section include clevis
hangers, c-clamps, channel supports, one-hole conduit straps, two-hole conduit straps,
round steel rods, AND expansion anchors.
C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment
are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 26 sections and/or on the
Drawings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports, anchors, sleeves,
firestopping, and seals of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years.
B. California Electrical Code (CEC): Comply with CEC as to construction and installation
of electrical supporting devices.
C. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI/NEMA Standard
Publication No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies".
D. MSS Compliance: Comply with MSS standard requirements pertaining to fabrication
and installation practices for pipe hangers and supports and with the seismic
requirements of OSHPD.
E. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's
"Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and
equipment mounting.
F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical supporting devices and provide products
and components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit catalog cuts, specifications, installation instructions for each type
of support, anchor, sleeve, firestopping, and seal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Provide supports, anchors, sleeves, firestopping, and seals complying with
manufacturer's standard materials, design, and construction, in accordance with
published product information, and as required for a complete installation and as herein
specified. Where more than one type of approved device meets indicated requirements,
selection is Installer's option.
2.02 SUPPORTS
A. Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated and having the
construction features indicated.
B. Clevis Hangers: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel, with 1/2"
diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 lbs. per 100 units.
C. Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, 1/2" x 5/8", black steel,
approximately 16 lbs. per 100 units.
D. C-Clamps: Black malleable iron, 1/2" rod size, approximately 70 lbs. per 100 units.
E. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit, one-hole malleable
iron with clamp back, approximately 19 lbs. per 100 units.
F. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel,
3/4" strap width, and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes.
G. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size, galvanized steel, approximately 4 lbs. per 100 units.
H. Round Steel Rod: Black steel, 1/2" diameter, approximately 67 lbs. per 100 feet.
I. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit, black steel,
approximately 200 lbs. per 100 units.
2.03 ANCHORS
A. Concrete expansion type anchors shall be equal to Hilti KWIK BOLT TZ Wedge
anchors. Allowable shear and tension values in pounds for each anchor shall comply
with latest issue of ICC-ES Report No. ESR-1917. Provide anchors of diameter and
minimum embedment as required by loads. Provide carbon steel anchors in dry
locations. Provide stainless steel anchors in damp and wet locations.
B. Expansion type anchors shall be proof load tested per requirements of the State of
California.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
SUPPORTING DEVICES 260529-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
2.04 U-CHANNEL STRUT SYSTEMS
A. Provide U-Channel seismic restraint strut system for supporting electrical equipment and
for fabricating conduit support trapezes. The channels shall consist of steel strips cold
formed to size with a continuous slot on one side and inturned clamping ridges on each
side. The channels installed within interior of building shall be phosphate cleaned and
painted with corrosion resistant green primer. The channels installed exterior to the
building shall be hot dipped galvanized, primed, and finish painted to match adjacent
surfaces. The slot acts as a guide for attachment nuts. Provide all fittings that mate and
match with the U-channel. Fittings shall have same finish as required for channels.
2.05 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Sheet metal pipe sleeves: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with
snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the
following gages: 3" and smaller, 20 gage; 4" to 6", 16 gage; over 6", 14 gage.
B. Steel pipe sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Remove burrs.
C. Iron pipe sleeves: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile iron pipe. Remove burrs.
D. Plastic pipe sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. Remove burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Install hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, firestopping, and seals as indicated in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recognized industry practices, and
details on Drawings, to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply
with NECA, CEC, NFPA, and ANSI/NEMA.
B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work as necessary
to interface installation of supports, anchors, sleeves, firestopping, and seals with other
work.
C. Minimum center to center spacing and edge distance of anchor bolts shall not exceed
manufacturer's specifications.
D. Conduit supports for a single conduit mounted to a surface shall be one-hole malleable
iron straps or two-hole steel straps.
E. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping securely from
building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be
supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with
maximum spacings indicated and/or required.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260533 RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of raceways work is indicated by Drawings and schedules.
B. Types of raceways in this section include rigid metal conduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit,
liquidtight flexible metal conduit, and associated fittings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types
and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five years.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems and provide products and
components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards
pertaining to raceways.
D. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable
to construction and installation of raceway systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including applicable specifications,
installation instructions, fittings, accessories, and general recommendations for each type
of raceway.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Allied Tube and Conduit, Protective Coating Developments,
Robroy Industries, Western Tube and Conduit.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Allied Tube and Conduit, Western Tube and Conduit.
C. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit and Fittings: Allied Tube and Conduit, Cantex.
D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Alflex, Anamet Electrical.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
E. Metallic Conduit Fittings: Appleton, Bridgeport, Crouse-Hinds, Raco, Thomas and
Betts.
F. Manufacturers offering products that are not named in this section, may be incorporated
into the Work, subject to compliance with the requirements of this section.
2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel conduit shall be hot dip galvanized steel manufactured
in accordance with UL Safety Standard #6 and ANSI C80.1.
B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be hot dip
galvanized in accordance with UL Safety Standard #6 and ANSI C80.1. Conduit shall
have a 40-mil PVC exterior coating bonded to the galvanized surface and a urethane
interior coating.
C. Fittings: All locknuts shall be galvanized or zinc plated steel. Fittings shall be threaded.
Insulating bushings shall be high impact thermoplastic. Fittings used outdoors or in
other wet locations shall be NRTL listed for wet location. Fittings for burial in concrete
shall be NRTL listed as concretetight. Fittings used with PVC coated rigid steel conduit
shall have a 40 mil PVC exterior coating bonded to the galvanized surface and a
urethane interior coating. All PVC coated rigid steel condulets and fittings shall be
supplied with stainless steel screws.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Electrical metallic tubing shall be galvanized steel with a corrosion resistant inner
coating and shall be produced in accordance with UL Safety Standard #797 and ANSI
C80.3.
B. Fittings: All locknuts shall be galvanized or zinc plated steel. Insulating bushings shall
be high impact thermoplastic. Fittings used outdoors or in other wet locations shall be
NRTL listed for wet location. Fittings for EMT shall be compression type zinc plated
steel or zinc die cast.
2.04 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Schedule 40: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall comply with
NEMA Standards Pub. No. TC2, Type 3, Schedule 40 PVC, for direct burial.
B. Fittings: Fittings used with rigid nonmetallic conduit shall comply with NEMA
Standards Pub No. TC3. Fittings shall match conduit type and material. Adhesive shall
be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.
2.05 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit: Liquidtight flexible steel conduit shall be
constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
galvanized inside and outside. Coat with liquidtight jacket of flexible thermoplastic.
Conduit shall include a copper equipment ground conductor in sizes through 1-1/4" trade
size. Aluminum conduit shall not be used.
B. Fittings: Provide galvanized fittings that are NRTL approved for grounding. Angle
connectors shall be accessible. All fittings shall be watertight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install electrical raceways where indicated, in compliance with this specification and
according to manufacturer's written instructions and recognized industry practices.
B. Coordinate installation of electrical raceways with other work, including metal and
concrete deck work, as necessary for proper interface.
C. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of
cables/conductors within raceways. All raceway fittings shall be made up tight.
D. Keep interior of conduit clean and clear. Keep ends of all conduits closed during
installation, to exclude water and foreign materials. Cap and seal all conduit stub-outs.
E. Cut ends of conduits square and ream to remove any burrs and sharp edges. Provide
conduit terminations at cabinets and boxes with locknuts and bushings as required.
Locknuts shall be installed so that the convex side is against the box. Provide watertight
conduit hubs on each entry into top or sides of electrical equipment where equipment is
installed in wet locations.
F. Provide junction or pull boxes where required for pulling conductors due to excessive
number of bends or length of conduit runs.
G. Re-route conduit where necessary to clear structural and mechanical obstructions. All
rerouting shall be approved by the Engineer.
H. Provide polyethylene pullrope, minimum 1/8" diameter, in all empty conduits. Pullrope
shall have minimum 200 lbs. tensile strength. Leave minimum 36" of slack at each end
of pullrope.
I. Field bends in conduit shall be smooth and shall not materially reduce the internal
diameter of the conduit. Bends shall not be made at joints. In no case shall radii be less
than required by applicable codes. All underground bends shall be made with as large a
radius as possible to facilitate pulling of conductors.
J. Orient all raceways to maintain accessibility to conduit bodies, junction boxes, pull
boxes, and outlet boxes.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
K. Install exposed and concealed conduit to maintain 6" clearance from parallel runs of
fluid filled piping, steam piping, and ductwork.
L. Provide insulated bushings or insulated throat connectors for terminations at all boxes
and cabinets including any underground conduits for installation of utility conductors.
M. Provide expansion fittings or flexible conduit wherever conduits cross building
separations, expansion joints, and seismic separations. Expansion provisions shall allow
for twice the expansion and relative drift of the building elements.
3.02 WIRING METHOD
A. Rigid steel conduit: Install rigid steel conduit embedded in concrete, in masonry walls,
where subject to mechanical damage, or where exposed.
B. PVC coated rigid steel conduit: Install PVC coated rigid steel conduit underground,
where in direct contact with earth, and where indicated on the Drawings. All
penetrations through concrete walls in damp or wet locations shall be made with PVC
coated rigid steel conduit.
C. Rigid nonmetallic conduit: Rigid nonmetallic conduit may be used in lieu of PVC
coated rigid steel conduit when installed underground or under slabs in contact with
earth. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall not be used for conduits containing branch circuit
conductors. All vertical elbows and risers in rigid nonmetallic conduit runs shall be
PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit.
D. Electrical metallic tubing: EMT may be used only where exposed on the Clearwell No.
2 tank over 6 feet above finished grade.
E. Liquidtight flexible steel conduit: Install liquidtight flexible steel conduit and fittings in
damp locations, wet locations, or where subjected to dripping oil for final connection to
motors or other vibrating equipment and where indicated on the Drawings. It may also
be used in other locations where, due to structural conditions, rigid steel conduit cannot
be used. This use will be allowed only if approved by the Engineer.
3.03 CONCEALED INSTALLATIONS
A. Maximum conduit trade size for embedment in concrete shall be 3/4" trade size. Install
conduit within middle one-third of concrete slab. Conduits shall be installed with a
minimum 1" concrete coverage. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure
them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Laterally space conduits
in parallel runs to allow concrete to pass between them. Coordinate conduit installation
with reinforcement bars.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
3.04 EXPOSED INSTALLATIONS
A. Secure conduit runs with one-hole malleable iron or two-hole galvanized clamp type
straps. Where several conduits are run together or where conduits are suspended, hang
them on metal framing systems.
B. Run exposed conduit at right angles or parallel to structural members, walls, floor, and
ceiling.
C. Conduit supports on Clearwell No. 2 shall be as described on the Drawings.
3.05 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS
A. Bury underground conduits containing maximum 600 volt conductor insulation a
minimum depth of 24" from surface of finished grade to the top surface of the conduit.
Where they run under roadways or parking areas, depth shall be 30" minimum from
finished grade. Coordinate all new underground installations with existing and new
piping systems and utilities.
B. Minimum underground conduit size shall be 3/4" trade size. Underground conduit runs
larger than 1" trade size, in non-traffic areas, shall be buried to a minimum depth of 12"
below slab. Where underground conduits rise through finished grade the curved portion
of bends shall not be visible.
C. Underground conduits smaller than 3" trade size shall be cleaned by pulling a wire brush
and swab through each conduit until conduit is clear of all particles including earth,
sand, and gravel.
D. Provide underground conduit stubouts with a flush concrete marker within the last 2' of
the stubout. Use a 3" cardboard tube for a form, allowing the concrete to spread out
around the conduit. Embed a brass marker in the face of concrete marker, indicating the
size, usage, and number of stubouts. Where the stubouts do not extend more than 5'
beyond a building wall, the marker may be secured to the wall directly above the
stubout.
E. All conduit runs installed underground shall be encased all around in minimum of 3" of
concrete unless otherwise noted. Where PVC coated rigid steel conduit is used, concrete
encasement shall not be required, unless otherwise noted.
F. Where other utility piping systems are encountered or being installed along a raceway
route, maintain a 12-inch-minimum vertical separation between raceway and other
systems at crossings. Maintain a 12-inch-minimum separation between raceways and
other systems in parallel runs. Do not place raceways over valves or couplings in other
piping systems. Refer conflicts with these requirements to the Engineer for instructions
before further work is done.
G. Trenching and backfill for underground or buried conduit or cable shall be provided as
part of the work of this section of the specifications. Trenching and backfill and testing
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
RACEWAYS 260533-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
and inspection of trenching and backfill for underground buried conduit or cable shall be
performed as specified in Section 312316 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting.
H. Concrete encased individual conduits and multiple conduits in the same trench (duct
banks) shall comply with the following:
1. Conduits shall be installed on a grade line of two inches fall per 100 feet, sloping
away from buildings and toward a manhole or pull box.
2. Concrete for conduit encasement shall be 3000 psi. The top three (3) inches of
envelope shall be colored red with red iron oxide pigment that is integrally mixed
with the concrete in the proportion of two pounds per sack of cement. Pigment
shall be commercially pure hydrated oxide, insoluble in water, free from soluble
salts and acids, with calcium sulfate less than 10%. Pigment shall be fortified with
a plasticizing agent that is compatible with type II portland cement. Pigment shall
be dry batched with the aggregate. For additional requirements, refer to Section
033000.
3. Separation of conduits shall be maintained by installing plastic spacers that
interlock horizontally and vertically. Spacers shall be installed to provide a
completely enclosed and supported conduit assembly every eight feet with hold
down anchors installed between each spacer. Include spacers between earth and
the bottom duct row to maintain concrete encasement around the conduits. Stagger
the joints of the conduits by rows and layers.
4. All conduits containing power cables shall be arranged so that exterior surface of
every conduit is within 3 inches of earth in at least one quadrant.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ELECTRICAL BOXES 260534-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260534 ELECTRICAL BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of electrical box work is indicated by Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Types of electrical boxes in this Section include outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes,
and conduit bodies.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes of types,
materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than three years.
B. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with CEC as applicable to
construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes.
C. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical boxes and provide products and
components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on pull boxes, junction boxes, outlet boxes,
and conduit bodies. Identify proposed equipment by manufacturer’s catalog numbers.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 OUTLET BOXES
A. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal outlet boxes of types, number of gangs, shapes,
and sizes including depth of boxes, to suit each respective location and installation.
Construct with threaded rigid hubs of the quantity and size required at each location, and
with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box covers and
wiring devices. Exposed outlet boxes in damp or wet locations shall be provided with
cast metal faceplates with spring hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each
application and device installed, including faceplate gaskets and corrosion-resistant
fasteners.
B. Provide boxes of proper code size for the number of and types of devices installed and
number and AWG of wires passing through or terminating therein, but in no case less
than 4-9/32" high by 2-3/4" wide by 2-5/8" deep, unless specifically noted as smaller on
the Drawings.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ELECTRICAL BOXES 260534-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
C. Exposed Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each
installation that are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements
of individual wiring situations. Provide cast metal covers either blank or with the proper
configuration for the devices installed at each location. Exposed outlet boxes in damp or
wet locations shall be provided with cast metal faceplates with covers suitably
configured for each application and device installed, including faceplate gaskets and
corrosion-resistant fasteners.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering cast metal outlet boxes that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to Appleton Electric Co., Bell Electric Co., Crouse Hinds Co., O-Z/Gedney, or
equal.
2.02 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
A. Provide galvanized code gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers,
of types, shapes, and sizes to suit each respective location and installation, with welded
seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. Furnish in
prime coat. Finish paint all exposed junction and pull boxes to match adjacent surfaces.
Provide screw fastened engraved nameplate on each pull box and junction box identified
with a specific name on the Drawings.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering junction and pull boxes that may be incorporated in the work include, but are
not limited to, Circle A-W, Cross, Hammond, or equal.
2.03 CONDUIT BODIES
A. Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies of types, shapes, and sizes to suit
respective locations and installation, constructed with threaded conduit entrance hubs,
removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws. Covers shall be gasketed Form 8
style.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering conduit bodies that may be incorporated in the work include Appleton Electric
Co., Crouse-Hinds Co., Killark Electric Mfg. Co., O-Z/Gedney Co., Pyle-National Co.,
or equal.
2.04 KNOCKOUT CLOSURES
A. Provide corrosion-resistant punched steel box knockout closures of types and sizes to
effectively close openings in the box.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ELECTRICAL BOXES 260534-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES
A. General: Install electrical boxes where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions, with applicable requirements of CEC and NECA's "Standard of
Installation," and with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes with wire/cable and raceway installation work.
C. Provide weatherproof outlets boxes in all damp and wet locations unless otherwise
noted.
D. Provide gasketed weatherproof covers for concealed boxes in all damp and wet locations
unless otherwise noted.
E. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.
F. Install boxes and conduit bodies in those locations that ensure ready accessibility of
electrical wiring.
G. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly
embed electrical boxes in concrete.
H. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 260553 BASIC ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of electrical identification is indicated by Drawings and schedules and this
specification.
B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:
1. Electrical power, communications, signal, and alarm conductors.
2. Operational instructions and warnings.
3. Equipment/system identification signs.
4. Conduits, outlets, and boxes.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical identification
products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than three years.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical identification and provide products and
components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal. Comply
with UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems", pertaining to electrical
identification systems.
C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEMA Standards Nos. WC-1 and
WC-2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors.
D. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with CEC as to installation of
identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. Identify all equipment,
conduits, outlets, junction boxes, and pull boxes of emergency systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and
products.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering electrical identification products that may be incorporated in the work include
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
W.H. Brady Co., Calpico Inc., Ideal Industries, Inc., National Band and Tag Co., Panduit
Corp., Seton Name Plate Co., or equal.
2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories
and types required for each application. Where more than a single type is specified for
an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each
application.
B. Color-Coded Conduit Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or
semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 350 degrees around
conduits, designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive. Except as otherwise indicated,
provide lettering that indicates voltage of conductor(s) in conduit. Provide 8" minimum
length Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulation, provide orange
markers with black letters.
C. Color-Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not
less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. Unless otherwise indicated or required by
governing regulations, provide orange tape.
D. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-
adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered plastic
coated type or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap, numbered to
show circuit identification.
E. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate,
complying with FS L-P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's
standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white core plies
(letter color). Provide thickness of 1/16", except as otherwise indicated. Punch plastic
laminate for mechanical fastening and provide self-tapping stainless steel screws.
Provide contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate
substrate.
2.03 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electrical identification
work with corresponding designations shown, specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers,
lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by
manufacturers, or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of
electrical systems and equipment. Comply with ANSI A13.1 pertaining to minimum
sizes for letters and numbers.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BASIC ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements: Install electrical identification products as indicated,
in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements of CEC.
Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification
after completion of painting.
B. Conduit Identification: Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed
mechanical piping that is identified by a color-coded method, apply color-coded
identification on electrical conduit in a manner similar to piping identification. Except
as otherwise indicated, use orange as coded color for conduit.
C. Cable/Conductor Identification: Apply cable/conductor identification including voltage,
phase, and feeder number on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet
where wires of more than one lighting or power circuit occur, except where another form
of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with
marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar
previously established identification for project electrical work.
D. Danger Signs: Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar
controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent
operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons or damage to or loss
of property.
E. Equipment/System Identification: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major
unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each
electrical system including communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless unit is
specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated,
provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" sign (2" high where 2 lines are
required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and
numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Install signs at locations
indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for greatest convenience of
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to
substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot
penetrate the substrate. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of
electrical work:
1. Switchboards, panelboards, transformers, electrical power, signal, and control
cabinets and enclosures.
2. Disconnect switches, individually mounted circuit breakers.
3. Control relays and starters.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
WIRING DEVICES 262726-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 262726 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this Section include receptacles, switches,
faceplates, plugs and plug connectors, and accessories.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices of types,
materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than three years.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to electrical wiring devices and provide products and
components that have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal.
C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards for general and specific purpose
wiring devices.
D. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with CEC as applicable to
construction and installation of electrical wiring devices.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices and faceplates
including color selections for all devices. Identify proposed wiring devices by
manufacturer’s catalog numbers.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in types, colors, and electrical ratings for
applications indicated and complying with NEMA Standards Publication No. WD 1.
Provide brown color devices except where otherwise indicated. Verify color selections
with Engineer.
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: GFCI receptacles shall be duplex,
three-wire, NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R, 125-volt, parallel slot, weather resistant, tamper
resistant, polarized where indicated, in ivory color. GFCI receptacles shall be 20A feed-
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
WIRING DEVICES 262726-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
through type, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit,
grounding type UL-rated Class A, 60 Hz, with solid state ground fault sensing and
signaling, with 4-6 milliamperes ground fault trip level. 15 amp devices shall be
Hubbell GFWRST15I, Arrow Hart TWRBR15I, or equal. 20 amp devices shall be
Hubbell GFWRST20I, Arrow Hart TWRBR20I, or equal.
2.03 SWITCHES
A. Provide line voltage specification grade lighting circuit switches in ivory color at
locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Snap Switches: Provide toggle switches, 20 ampere, 120/277 volts AC, quiet type with
steel mounting strap insulated from mechanism. Equip with plaster ears, nylon or lexan
switch handle, grounding terminal, and back and side wired screw terminals. Devices
shall be single pole as manufactured by Hubbell 1221I, Leviton 1221-2I, or equal.
2.04 FACEPLATES
A. Faceplates: Provide single switch and duplex outlet faceplates for wiring devices of
types and sizes and with ganging and cutouts as indicated.
B. Damp and Wet locations: Receptacle and switch covers shall be high impact
polycarbonate NEMA 3R wet location labeled plate. Receptacle covers shall be
provided with cover hood that maintains a weatherproof rating with the attachment plug
cap inserted or removed. Cover hood shall be identified as 'extra duty' and shall be
capable of being locked in the closed position with a padlock.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering faceplates that may be incorporated in the work include Hubbell, Leviton, or
equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES
A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions and with applicable requirements of CEC and of the NECA "Standard of
Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
requirements.
B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as
necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean and free from building
materials, dirt, and debris.
D. Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work is completed.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
WIRING DEVICES 262726-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Ensure proper and cautious use of convenience outlets, if used during construction. At
time of Substantial Completion, replace those items that have been damaged, including
those burned and scorched by faulty plugs.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper
polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
SECTION 262923 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extent of variable frequency drive work is indicated by drawings, schedules, and one-
line diagram. Types of variable frequency drive work in this section include two 6-pulse
drives with line reactor and PWM output load filter.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of variable frequency drives,
line reactors, and PWM output filters, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than three years.
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Compliance and Labeling: Comply
with safety standards pertaining to UL 508 and provide products and components that
have been listed and labeled by an NRTL such as UL or equal.
C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with requirements of IEEE 519 - IEEE Standard Practices
and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems.
D. California Electrical Code (CEC) Compliance: Comply with CEC requirements as to
materials and installation of variable frequency drives, associated equipment, and wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on variable frequency drives. Data shall
include, but not be limited to, voltages, number of phases, frequency, and short-circuit
and continuous current ratings. Provide manufacturer's application data for all major
components including variable frequency drive, contactors, circuit breakers and fuses,
control power transformers, pilot devices, relays/timers, and line reactors and PWM
output filter. Provide equipment installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of equipment enclosures showing
minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and
devices, and material lists for each variable frequency drive, line reactor and PWM
output filter. Include the following:
1. Elevation Drawings: Include dimensional information and conduit routing
locations.
2. Unit Descriptions: Include amperage ratings, enclosure ratings, fault ratings,
nameplate information, etc.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Include amperage ratings, circuit breaker frame sizes, circuit
breaker continuous amp ratings, etc.
4. Control Diagram: Include disconnect devices, pilot devices, etc.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
5. Major components list.
6. Submit certification that variable frequency drives and components will remain in
place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event. The specified seismic forces shall be as indicated in California Building
Code Seismic Zone 4. Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting
and anchorage provisions.
7. Submit anchor bolt provisions including anchor bolt hole sizes and locations.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's printed instruction
information, recommended renewal parts list, insulation resistance measurements, and
include information required in 1.03A and 1.03B. Include manufacturer's written
instructions for testing and adjusting devices.
D. Field quality-control test reports: Submit test procedures used, test results that comply
with requirements, and results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test
results that comply with requirements.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide variable frequency drives as
manufactured by companies regularly specializing in the manufacture of products
specified in this Section with a minimum of five years documented experience. Drives
shall be PowerFlex 755 as manufactured by Rockwell Automation, or equal. PWM
output filter shall be V1K as manufactured by TCI. The NEMA 4 enclosure shall be as
manufactured by the VFD manufacturer.
2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS
A. Hardware: Use diode bridge or SCR bridge on the input rectifier. Include DC bus
inductor. Provide switching logic power supply operating from the DC bus. Incorporate
phase to phase and phase to ground MOV protection on the AC input line. Connections
shall be plug-in gold-plated on printed circuit boards. Microprocessor based inverter
logic shall be isolated from power circuits. The Inverter section shall not require
commutation capacitors. Provide embedded Ethernet port for direct network cable
connections. Include a battery receptacle for Lithium battery power to the Real Time
Clock. Incorporate additional DPI port for handheld and remote HIM options, and
dedicated Digital Input for hardware enable.
B. Control:
1. Control Logic: The unit shall have the ability to operate with motor disconnected.
Provide a controlled shut down, when properly protected, with no component
failure in the event of an output phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit.
Provide annunciation of the fault condition. Provide multiple programmable stop
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
modes including Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold, Fast Braking, and
Current Limit Stop. Provide multiple acceleration and deceleration rates with an
adjustable output frequency up to 650Hz.
2. DeviceLogix Control: The unit shall have the ability to control outputs and
manage status information locally within the VFD, to function stand-alone or
complimentary to supervisory control, to speed reaction time by processing in the
VFD, and to provide scaling, selector switches, or other data manipulations not
already built into the VFD. Unit shall also have the ability to read inputs/write
outputs and exclusively control the VFD, to provide an option for decision making
if communication is lost with main controller, to control other VFDs via a peer-to-
peer EtherNet/IP network, and to write programs off-line.
C. Motor Control Modes: Selectable Sensorless Vector, Flux Vector, V/Hz, Interior
Permanent Magnet Motor, Surface Mount Permanent Magnet Motor, and Adjustable
Voltage Control modes shall be selectable through programming. The drive shall be
supplied with a Start-up and Auto-tune mode. The V/Hz mode shall be programmable
for fan curve or full custom patterns and shall be capable of Open Loop V/Hz.
D. Current Limit: Provide programmable current limit from 20 to 160% of rated output
current. Current limit shall be active for all drive states: accelerating, constant speed and
decelerating. The drive shall employ PI regulation with an adjustable gain for smooth
transition in and out of current limit.
E. Acceleration / Deceleration: Accel/Decel settings shall provide separate adjustments to
allow either setting to be adjusted from 0 to 3600 seconds. A second set of remotely
selectable accel/decel settings shall be accessible through digital inputs.
F. Speed Profiles: Programming capability shall allow the user to produce speed profiles
with linear acceleration/deceleration or "S Curve" profiles that provide changing
accel/decel rates. The S Curve profiles shall be adjustable.
G. Adjustments: A digital interface shall be available for all set-up, operation and
adjustment settings. All adjustments shall be stored in nonvolatile memory. No
potentiometer adjustments shall be required. Nonvolatile memory for factory default
values shall be provided. Software shall be available for trending and diagnostics, as
well as online and offline programming functionality.
H. Process PID Control: The drive shall incorporate an internal process PI regulator with
proportional and integral gain adjustments as well as error inversion and output
clamping functions. The feedback shall be configurable for normal or square root
functions. If the feedback indicates that the process is moving away from the set-point,
the regulator shall adjust the drive output until the feedback equals the reference.
Process control shall be capable of being enabled or disabled with a hardwire input.
Transitioning in and out of process control shall be capable of being tuned for faster
response by preloading the integrator. Protection shall be provided for a loss of
feedback or reference signal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
I. Skip Frequencies: Provide three adjustable set points that lock out continuous operation
at frequencies which may produce mechanical resonance shall be provided. The set
points shall have a bandwidth adjustable from Maximum Reverse Speed to Maximum
Forward Speed.
J. Fault Reset / Run. The drive shall provide up to nine automatic fault reset and restarts
following a fault condition before locking out and requiring manual restart. The
automatic mode shall not be applicable to a ground fault, shorted output faults and other
internal microprocessor faults. The time between restarts shall be adjustable from 0.5
seconds to 30 seconds.
K. Run on Power Up: A user programmable restart function shall be provided to allow
restart of the equipment after restoration of power after long duration power outages.
Restart time dependent on presence of incoming signal.
L. Fault Memory: The last 32 fault codes shall be stored and time stamped in a fault buffer.
Information about the drive’s condition at the time of the last fault such as operating
frequency, output current, dc bus voltage and twenty-seven other status conditions shall
be stored. A power-up marker shall be provided at each power-up time to aid in
analyzing fault data. The last 32 alarm codes shall be stored and time stamped for
additional troubleshooting reference.
M. Overload Protection: The drive shall provide internal class 10 adjustable overload
protection. Overload protection shall be speed sensitive and adjustable. A viewable
parameter shall store the overload usage.
N. Auto Economizer: An auto economizer feature shall be available to automatically
reduce the output voltage when the drive is operating in an idle mode (drive output
current less than programmed motor FLA). The voltage shall be reduced to minimize
flux current in a lightly loaded motor thus reducing kW usage. When the load increases,
the drive shall automatically return to normal operation.
O. Terminal Blocks: Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for power wiring.
Terminal blocks shall be provided for control wiring on all frames. The control terminal
blocks shall be rated for 115V AC. I/O terminal blocks shall be removable with wiring
in place.
P. Flying Start: The drive shall be capable of determining the speed and direction of a
spinning motor and adjust its output to "pick-up" the motor at the rotating speed. This
feature is disabled by default.
Q. Inputs and Outputs: The Input / Output option modules shall consist of both analog and
digital I/O. No jumpers or switches shall be required to configure digital inputs and
outputs. All digital input and output functions shall be fully programmable. Inputs shall
be optically isolated from the drive control logic. The control interface card shall
provide input terminals for access to fixed drive functions that include start, stop,
external fault, speed, and enable. The VFD shall be capable of supporting up to 10
analog inputs, 10 analog outputs, 31 digital inputs, 10 relay outputs, 10 transistor
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
outputs, and 5 positive temperature coefficient (PTC) inputs. The Input / Output option
modules shall have the following features:
1. Analog Inputs: Provide one (1) or two (2) differentially isolated, ±10V (bi-polar),
88k ohm input impedance, 11 bit plus sign. Analog inputs shall be user
programmable for a variety of uses including frequency command and process
loop input. Analog inputs shall be user programmable for function scaling
(including invert), offset, signal loss detect and square root.
2. Analog Outputs: Provide one (1) or two (2) ±10V (bi-polar) / 11 bit & sign, 2k
ohm minimum load, 4-20 mA, 11 bit plus sign, 400 ohm maximum load. The
analog output shall be user programmable to be proportional to one of fourteen
process parameters including output frequency, output current, encoder feedback,
output power. Programming shall be available to select either absolute or signed
values of these parameters.
3. Digital Inputs: Provide three (3) or six (6) digital inputs rated 24V DC/115V AC.
All inputs shall be individually programmable for multiple functions including:
Start, Run, Stop, Auxiliary Fault, Speed Select, Jog and Process PI functions. A
single safety input (ATEX) shall be a configurable option for a thermostat or PTC
temperature sensor.
4. Digital Outputs: At a minimum provide one (1) relay output (N.O. or N.C.). For
240V AC or 24V DC, N.O. contact output ratings shall be 2 amp max., general
purpose (inductive)/resistive. N.C. contact output ratings shall be 2 amp max.,
resistive only. Relays shall be programmable to multiple conditions including:
Fault, Alarm, At Speed, Drive Ready and PI Excess Error. Timers shall be
available for each output to control the amount of time, after the occurring event,
that the output relay actually changes state. Transistor outputs shall be available
in quantities varying from zero (0) to two (2). For 24V DC, transistor output
rating shall be 1 amp max, resistive.
R. Reference Signals: The drive shall be capable of using analog input, preset speeds,
remote potentiometer, digital MOP, human interface module, and communication
networks as input reference signals.
S. Loss of Reference: The drive shall be capable of sensing reference loss conditions. In
the event of loss of the reference signal, the drive shall be user programmable to fault the
drive and coast to stop, issue a minor fault - allows the drive to continue running while
some types of faults are present, and alarm and maintain last reference. When using a
communications network to control the drive, the communications adapter shall have
configurable responses to network disruptions and controller idle (fault or program)
conditions including fault, stop, zero data, hold last state, and send fault configuration.
T. Metering: At a minimum, the Human Interface Module shall access the output current in
amps, the output voltage in volts, the output power in kW, the elapsed MWh, the DC bus
voltage, the frequency, the heatsink temperature, the last eight faults, the elapsed run
time, and the IGBT temperature.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
U. Faults: At a minimum, the following faults shall be accessible through the Human
Interface Module shall access power loss, undervoltage, overvoltage, motor overload,
heat sink over-temperature, maximum Retries, and phase to phase and phase to ground
faults.
V. Predictive Diagnostics: At a minimum, the following predictive diagnostic features shall
be provided: Relay output life cycles based on load type and amps, hours of fan life
based on load and ambient temperature, motor bearing life based on expected hours of
use, motor Lubrication schedule based on hours of use, and machine bearing life based
on expected hours of use.
W. Provide a Real-Time Clock capable of providing time stamped events and having the
ability to be set locally or via a remote controller. Include the ability to be
programmable for month, day, year and local time zones in HH:MM:SS.
2.03 VFD PACKAGED SYSTEM
A. Ratings: The unit shall be rated for 480V AC, 60 Hz input with a supply input voltage
tolerance shall be ± 10% of nominal line voltage. The displacement power factor shall
be capable of maintaining a minimum true power factor of 0.95 or better at rated load
and nominal line voltage, over the entire speed range. Provide unit with a minimum
efficiency of 96.5% (+/- 1%) at 100% speed and 100% motor load at nominal line
voltage. Include control power supplies, control circuits, and cooling fans shall be
included in all loss calculations. Operating ambient temperature range without derating
shall be 32 °F to 104 °F. Operating relative humidity range shall be 5% to 95% non-
condensing.
1. Provide 110% overload capability for up to one minute and 150% for up to 3
seconds.
2. Auto Reset/Run: For faults other than those caused by a loss of power or any other
non-critical fault, the drive system shall provide a means to automatically clear the
fault and resume operation.
3. Ride-Through: The VFD system shall attempt to ride through power dips up to
20% of nominal. The duration of ride-through shall be inversely proportional to
load. For outages greater than 20%, the drive shall stop the motor and issue a
power loss alarm signal to a process controller, which may be forwarded to an
external alarm signaling device.
4. Run on Power Up: The VFD system shall provide circuitry to allow for remote
restart of equipment after a power outage. Unless indicated in the contact
drawings, faults due to power outages shall be remotely resettable. The VFD
system shall indicate a loss of power to a process controller, which may be
forwarded to an external alarm signaling device. Upon indication of power
restoration the process controller will attempt to clear any faults and issue a run
command, if desired.
5. Communications: The VFD shall provide an embedded EtherNet/IP port, be
capable of communicating on multiple networks, and be capable of supporting the
DeviceNet, EtherNet/IP, ControlNet Coax, ControlNet Fiber, Interbus, CANopen,
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
Modbus/TCP, Modbus RTU, Profibus DP, RS-485 DF1, RS-485 HVAC, Remote
I/O, Profinet I/O, and BACnet/IP
6. Enclosure Door Mounted Human Interface Module (HIM): Provide NEMA/UL
Type 1 HIM with integral LCD display, operating keys and programming keys.
The HIM shall have a seven (7) line by twenty-one (21) character backlit LCD
display with graphics capability, and include drive operating conditions,
adjustments and fault indications. The HIM shall be configured to display in the
three distinct zones including a top zone that shall display the status of direction,
drive condition, fault / alarm conditions and Auto / Manual mode, a middle zone
that shall display drive output frequency, and a bottom zone, configurable as a
display for either programming menus / information or as a two-line user display
for two additional values utilizing scaled units. The HIM shall provide digital
speed control and use a keypad with programming keys, drive operating keys
(Start, Stop, Direction, Jog and Speed Control), and numeric keys for direct entry.
B. Enclosure shall be rated NEMA/UL Type 3R and painted per the manufacturer’s
standard. Provide entry and exit locations for power cables, a label for UL508, and a
drive system nameplate be marked with system Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR).
C. Drive Enclosure Input Disconnect: Provide an enclosure door interlocked disconnect
with thermal magnet circuit breaker. Include operator handles that provide externally
operated main disconnect handle that are lockable with up to three lockout / tagout
padlock positions.
D. Enclosure shall be provided with an air conditioning system powered by the incoming
circuit. Provide overcurrent protection. Air conditioner shall be Pentair model #
N431246G050, or equal.
E. Provide enclosure with a 115V 400W heater.
F. Control Power Transformer: Provide a control power transformer mounted and wired
inside of the drive system enclosure, rated for the VFD power requirements.
G. Harmonic Mitigation Techniques
1. Drive Input Line Reactor: Provide a drive input line reactor mounted within the
drive system enclosure constructed with iron core and an impedance of 3 percent.
The winding shall be copper or aluminum wound. The insulation shall be Class H
with a 115 °C rise over 50 °C ambient. The unit shall be rated for system voltage,
ampacity, and frequency.
2. PWM output Filter: The output filter shall consist of a gapped, three phase, iron
core inductor; AC-rated, polypropylene capacitors; and wire-wound resistors. The
filter shall be rated for application at a maximum fundamental system frequency of
60Hz at nominal system voltages up to 600V. The filter shall operate at a
maximum carrier frequency of 8kHz at 40% of fundamental voltage. The ambient
temperature of operation shall be 40°C. The maximum distance from the drive to
the input terminals of the filter shall be 20 ft. Filter application shall be effective
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-8
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
for lead distances between the drive and the motor that range from 50 ft. to 3,000
ft., depending on the application details (consult factory). Leads should not be
electrically oversized more than four cable sizes or the mechanical limitations of
the cable connectors Include the following components and features:
a. INDUCTORS: The three phase inductors shall be designed for harmonic
filtering service and for slowing the rate of rapid current changes. The
inductors shall be UL component-recognized and shall be built to comply
with UL 508A standard. Construction shall be of copper wire wound on
magnetic grade steel. Inductors shall be sized appropriately for the total
connected load. The design maximum temperature rise for reactors shall be
115° C or 155º C depending on frame size at rated current. The core shall be
made of laminated, electrical steel (grade M50 or better). Brackets shall be
ASTM structural steel or structural aluminum. Coils shall be wedged in
place and the core shall be locked in place using vertical ties or rods.
Windings shall consist of copper wire or of copper foil. Terminations shall
be copper alloy ring lugs, UL-recognized terminal blocks, or solid copper
bus. Sheet insulation shall be Tufquin or Cequin IF or Dupont Nomex 410
of the thickness as required for UL insulation systems. Inductors shall be air-
gapped to control saturation. Inductance shall be measured under full load
and shall be within 10% of design value. Completed inductors shall be
impregnated with 100% solid epoxy resin. All insulation varnish systems
shall be rated class R (220° C) or H (180°C), 600V. Inductance shall remain
above 50% of nominal for any overload up to 200% of rated current.
Inductors shall not sustain any thermal damage for levels up to 150% of
rated current for a minimum period of five minutes. Inductors shall be Hi-
Pot tested (2,640V, 60 Hz, 1 second) line-to-line and line-to-ground..
b. CAPACITORS: Capacitors shall be constructed of metallized polypropylene
film material. Capacitors shall be Y(Wye)-connected and ungrounded
neutral. Each capacitor element shall be rated at minimum of 700V AC.
c. RESISTORS: Resistors shall consist of wire-wound cement construction and
incorporate thermal insulating terminations. Resistors shall be derated to
operate at twice the calculated worst case requirements for watts loss.
H. Auxiliary Relays: Provide relays for Drive Alarm, Drive Fault, Drive Run, and System
Status Faults. The relays shall be Allen-Bradley 700-HC (2 N.O. & 2 N.C.). The relay
contacts shall be rated for 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0 amp resistive, 2.5 amp inductive.
I. Control Interface: The control terminals shall be rated for 115V AC. The control
interface shall provide input terminals for access to VFD functions that include start,
stop, external fault, speed select, and enable, as required.
J. Motor Heater Control: The drive system shall provide the drive control circuitry to
energize an existing motor heater whenever the motor is not running via remote power.
The heater control shall be interlocked with the drive and/or bypass and shall be
energized whenever the motor is not running. The source shall be remotely provided. A
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-9
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
pilot light with LED, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800T shall be mounted on the drive system
enclosure door for indication of Motor Heater On.
K. Hand/Off/Auto Selector Switch: Provide a "Hand/Off/Auto" selector switch, mounted
on the enclosure door. The "Hand/Off/Auto" selector switch shall start the drive in the
“Hand” mode and stop the drive in the “Off” mode. In the “Auto” mode the drive shall
be started and stopped from a remote “RUN” contact. In all modes, Auxiliary and
Enable inputs to the drive control interface board must be present before the drive will
start. When a HIM is present, the stop function shall always be available to stop the
drive regardless of the selected mode (“Hand” or “Auto”). The HIM will be non-
functional (except for the display and programming) when the switch is in “Off” mode.
The HIM shall stop the drive if the switch is in the “Auto” mode with the remote start
contact initiated. The drive speed reference shall be controlled from the HIM, unless a
separate door-mounted potentiometer is provided, when in “Hand” mode (factory default
setting). The drive shall have the capability of smoothly transferring from the automatic
speed reference to the manual speed reference on the HIM, without perturbation in the
speed reference. The drive speed reference shall be controlled by a remote 4 to 20 mA
input when in “Auto” mode. The device shall be an Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800T
mounted on the drive system enclosure door.
L. Drive Disable Mushroom Push Button: Provide a maintained mushroom style push
button, mounted on the enclosure door that when pushed, will open the drive enable
input. The device shall be an Allen-Bradley Bulletin mounted on the drive system
enclosure door.
M. Pilot Lights: Provide LED pilot lights, mounted on the enclosure door, for indication of
the Run, Drive Fault, Control Power On, and Motor Fault. The device shall be an Allen-
Bradley Bulletin mounted on the drive system enclosure door.
N. Motor Run Time Meter: Provide a digital, non-resettable, door-mounted elapsed time
meter. The meter shall be electrically interlocked with the Drive Run relay and Bypass
contactor to indicate actual motor operating hours.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Per NEMA ICS 3.1, install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
printed installation drawings, instructions, wiring diagrams, and as indicated on project
drawings and the approved shop drawings.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Prior to energization of circuitry: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection
and electrical test stated in ANSI/NETA - ATS 2009 “Acceptance Testing
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 262923-10
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 18 Sep 2019
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems”, section
7.17. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. Inspect for
physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers,
covers, and safety features. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground with insulation resistance tester. Include external annunciation
and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by
manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
B. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings,
measured insulation, and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D. Complete written instructions manuals, operating schedules, parts lists, blueprints,
wiring diagrams, maintenance and repair manuals, shall be submitted to the Engineer
before final approval. The foregoing tests and associated work shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Manufacturer to provide a quantity of one 4-hour session of on-site instruction.
B. The instruction shall include the operational and maintenance requirements of the
variable frequency drive.
C. The basis of the training shall be the variable frequency drives, the engineered drawings
and the user manual. At a minimum, the training shall:
1. Review the engineered drawings identifying the components shown on the
drawings.
2. Review starting / stopping and speed control options for the controller.
3. Review operation of the Human Interface Module for programming and
monitoring of the variable frequency drive.
4. Review the maintenance requirements of the variable frequency drive.
5. Review safety concerns with operating the variable frequency drive.
D. The training and associated work shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
SECTION 312316 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, testing, and installation for pipeline trench excavation,
backfilling, and compacting.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Existing Conditions: Special Provisions.
B. General Concrete Construction: 030500.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a copy of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that material contains less
than 0.25% asbestos by weight or volume.
B. Submit a report from a testing laboratory indicating material conforms to the specified
gradations or characteristics for, granular material, imported sand, and rock refill for
foundation stabilization
C. Submit method(s) of compaction including removal sequence of shoring where used.
1.04 TESTING FOR COMPACTION
A. The Owner will test for compaction as described below.
B. Determine the density of soil in place by nuclear methods, ASTM D6938. Compaction
tests will be performed for each lift or layer.
C. Determine laboratory moisture-density relations of soils by ASTM D1557.
D. Determine the relative density of cohesionless soils by ASTM D4253 and D4254.
E. Sample backfill materials per ASTM D75.
F. "Relative compaction" is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the in-place dry density
to the laboratory maximum dry density.
G. Compaction shall be deemed to comply with the specifications when no more than one
test falls below the specified relative compaction. The one test shall be no more than
three percentage points below the specified compaction. The Contractor shall pay the
costs for any retesting or additional testing of work not conforming to the specifications.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
H. Where compaction tests indicate a failure to meet the specified compaction, the Owner
will take additional tests every 25 feet in each direction until the extent of the failing
area is identified. Rework the entire failed area until the specified compaction has been
achieved.
1.05 PAVEMENT ZONE
The pavement zone includes the asphalt concrete and aggregate base pavement section
placed over the trench backfill.
1.06 STREET ZONE
The street zone is the top 30 inches of the trench immediately below the pavement zone
in paved areas. Where the depth of cover over the pipe does not permit the full specified
thickness of the street zone, construct a thinner street zone, extending from the top of the
pipe zone to the bottom of the pavement zone.
1.07 TRENCH ZONE
The trench zone includes the portion of the trench from the top of the pipe zone to the
bottom of the street zone in paved areas or to the existing surface in unpaved areas. If the
resulting trench zone is less than 24 inches thick, the street zone shall extend to the top
of the pipe zone and there shall be no separate trench zone.
1.08 PIPE ZONE
The pipe zone shall include the full width of trench from the bottom of the pipe or
conduit to a horizontal level above the top of the pipe, as specified below. Where
multiple pipes or conduits are placed in the same trench, the pipe zone shall extend from
the bottom of the lowest pipe to a horizontal level above the top of the highest or
topmost pipe. Thickness of pipe zone above the highest top of pipe shall be 6 inches.
1.09 PIPE BASE OR BEDDING
The pipe base or bedding shall be defined as a layer of material immediately below the
bottom of the pipe or conduit and extending over the full trench width in which the pipe
is bedded. Thickness of pipe base shall be 6 inches.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 IMPORTED MATERIAL FOR BACKFILL--STREET AND TRENCH ZONES
Imported granular material shall be used for backfill above the pipe zone. Material shall
be ¾” Class 2 Base per Section 26 of the State Standard Specifications.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
2.02 IMPORTED SAND--PIPE ZONE AND PIPE BASE
A. Imported sand used in the pipe zone or for the pipe base shall have the following
gradation:
Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight
3/8 inch 100
No. 4 75 to 100
No. 30 12 to 50
No. 100 5 to 20
No. 200 0 to 10
B. Imported sand shall have a minimum sand equivalent of 30 per ASTM D2419.
2.03 SAND-CEMENT SLURRY BACKFILL--PIPE ZONE
Sand-cement slurry backfill shall consist of one sack (94 pounds) of Type I or II portland
cement added per cubic yard of imported sand and sufficient water for workability.
2.04 CONCRETE FOR PIPE ENCASEMENT AND THRUST BLOCKS
A. Concrete for unreinforced pipe encasement and thrust blocks shall be Class C per
Section 030500, unless otherwise shown in the drawings.
B. Provide thrust blocks at fittings in pipe having rubber gasket bell-and-spigot or
unrestrained mechanical joints. Do not provide thrust blocks for steel pipe having
welded, flanged, or butt-strap joints unless detailed in the drawings or required in the
detailed piping specification.
2.05 WATER FOR COMPACTION
Water shall be free of organic materials injurious to the pipe coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SLOPING, SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING OF TRENCHES
Trenches shall have sloping, sheeting, shoring, and bracing conforming with
29CFR1926, Subpart P--Excavations, CAL/OSHA requirements, and the Special
Provisions.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
3.02 SIDEWALK, PAVEMENT, AND CURB REMOVAL
Cut bituminous and concrete pavements regardless of the thickness and curbs and
sidewalks prior to excavation of the trenches with a pavement saw or pavement cutter.
Width of the pavement cut shall be at least equal to the required width of the trench at
ground surface. Haul pavement and concrete materials from the site. Do not use for
trench backfill.
3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown in the drawings with allowance for
pipe thickness, sheeting and shoring if used, and for pipe base or special bedding. If the
trench is excavated below the required grade, refill any part of the trench excavated
below the grade at no additional cost to the Owner with granular material. Place the
refilling material over the full width of trench in compacted layers not exceeding 8
inches deep to the established grade with allowance for the pipe base or special bedding.
B. Trench widths in the pipe zone shall be as shown in the drawings. If no details are
shown, maximum width shall be 12 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter.
Comply with 29CFR Part 1926 Subpart P--Excavations. Trench width at the top of the
trench will not be limited except where width of excavation would undercut adjacent
structures and footings. In such case, width of trench shall be such that there is at least 2
feet between the top edge of the trench and the structure or footing.
C. Construct trenches in rock by removing rock to a minimum of 6 inches below bottom of
pipe and backfilling with imported sand.
3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION IN BACKFILL AND EMBANKMENT AREAS
A. Construct and compact the embankment to an elevation of 1-foot minimum over the top
of the largest pipe or conduit to be installed.
B. Excavate trench in the compacted backfill or embankment.
3.05 LOCATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. During trench excavation, place the excavated material only within the working area. Do
not obstruct any roadways or streets. Do not place trench spoil over pipe, buried utilities,
manholes, or vaults. Conform to federal, state, and local codes governing the safe
loading of trenches with excavated material.
B. Locate trench spoil piles at least 15 feet from the tops of the slopes of trenches. Do not
operate cranes and other equipment on the same side of the trench as the spoil piles.
3.06 DEWATERING
Provide and maintain means and devices to remove and dispose of water entering the
trench excavation during the time the trench is being prepared for the pipe laying, during
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
the laying of the pipe, and until the backfill at the pipe zone has been completed. These
provisions shall apply during both working and nonworking hours, including lunchtime,
evenings, weekends, and holidays. Dispose of the water in a manner to prevent damage
to adjacent property and in accordance with regulatory agency requirements. Do not
drain trench water through the pipeline under construction.
3.07 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION
A. After the required excavation has been completed, the Owner will inspect the exposed
subgrade to determine the need for any additional excavation. It is the intent that
additional excavation be conducted in all areas within the influence of the pipeline where
unacceptable materials exist at the exposed subgrade. Overexcavation shall include the
removal of all such unacceptable material that exist directly beneath the pipeline to a
width 24 inches greater than the pipe outside diameter and to the depth required.
B. Place filter fabric on the bottom of the trench and up the sides a sufficient height to
retain rock refill material. Backfill the trench to subgrade of pipe base with rock refill
material for foundation stabilization. Place the foundation stabilization material over the
full width of the trench and compact in layers not exceeding 8 inches deep to the
required grade. Foundation stabilization work shall be executed in accordance with a
change order.
C. Rock refill used by the Contractor for his convenience will not be cause for any
additional payment.
3.08 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING
A. Grade the bottom of the trench to the line and grade to which the pipe is to be laid, with
allowance for pipe thickness. Remove hard spots that would prevent a uniform thickness
of bedding. Place the specified thickness of pipe base material over the full width of
trench. Grade the top of the pipe base ahead of the pipe laying to provide firm,
continuous, uniform support along the full length of pipe, and compact to the relative
compaction specified herein. Before laying each section of the pipe, check the grade and
correct any irregularities.
B. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire
joint. Fill the area excavated for the joints with the bedding material specified.
C. Inspect each pipe and fitting before lowering the buried pipe or fitting into the trench.
Inspect the interior and exterior protective coatings. Patch damaged areas in the field
with material recommended by the protective coating manufacturer. Clean ends of pipe
thoroughly. Remove foreign matter and dirt from inside of pipe and keep clean during
and after installation.
D. Handle pipe in such a manner as to avoid damage to the pipe. Do not drop or dump pipe
into trenches under any circumstances.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
E. After pipe has been bedded, place pipe zone material simultaneously on both sides of the
pipe, in maximum 8-inch lifts, keeping the level of backfill the same on each side.
Carefully place the material around the pipe so that the pipe barrel is completely
supported and no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Use particular
care in placing material on the underside of the pipe to prevent lateral movement during
subsequent backfilling.
F. Compact each lift to the relative compaction specified herein.
G. Push the specified backfill material carefully onto the backfill previously placed in the
pipe zone. Do not permit free-fall of the material until at least 2 feet of cover is provided
over the top of the pipe. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material directly onto the
pipe or the tamped material around the pipe. Do not operate heavy equipment or a
sheepsfoot wheel mounted on a backhoe over the pipe until at least 3 feet or one-half of
the internal diameter, whichever is greater, of backfill has been placed and compacted
over the pipe.
H. When the pipe laying is not in progress, including the noon hours, close the open ends of
pipe. Do not allow trench water, animals, or foreign material to enter the pipe.
I. Keep the trench dry until the pipe laying and jointing are completed.
3.09 BACKFILL COMPACTION
A. Unless otherwise shown in the drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for
the particular type of pipe installed, relative compaction in pipe trenches shall be as
follows:
1. Pipe Zone: 90% relative compaction.
2. Backfill in Trench Zone to Street Zone in Paved Areas: 90% relative compaction.
3. Backfill in Street Zone in Paved Areas: 95% relative compaction.
B. Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Compact by using
mechanical compaction or hand tamping. Do not use high-impact hammer-type
equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants in writing that such use will not
damage the pipe.
C. Compact material placed within 12 inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand
tamping only.
D. Do not use any axle-driven or tractor-drawn compaction equipment within 5 feet of
building walls, foundations, and other structures.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING 312316-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S312316 - TRENCHING,
BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING)
3.10 MATERIAL REPLACEMENT
Remove and replace any trenching and backfilling material that does not meet the
specifications, at the Contractor's expense.
3.11 PLACING SAND-CEMENT SLURRY BACKFILL
Place sand-cement slurry backfill in a uniform manner that will prevent voids in or
segregation of the material. Remove foreign material that falls into the excavation or
trench. Do not commence backfilling over or place any material over the slurry cement
backfill until at least four hours after placing the sand-cement slurry.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400500 - GENERAL PIPING
REQUIREMENTS)
SECTION 400500 GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section describes the general requirements for selecting piping materials; selecting
the associated bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanges for the various piping services in the
project; and miscellaneous piping items.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit affidavit of compliance with referenced standards (e.g., AWWA, ANSI, ASTM,
etc.).
C. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if
specified. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory for
materials originating outside of the United States.
D. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for gaskets supplied showing dimensions and bolting
recommendations.
1.03 DEFINITIONS OF BURIED AND EXPOSED PIPING
A. Buried piping is piping buried in the soil, commencing at the wall or beneath the slab of
a structure. Where a coating is specified, provide the coating up to the structure wall.
Unless detailed otherwise, coating shall penetrate wall no less than 1 inch. Piping
encased in concrete is considered to be buried. Do not coat encased pipe.
B. Exposed piping is piping in any of the following conditions or locations:
1. Above ground.
2. Inside buildings, vaults, or other structures.
3. In underground concrete trenches or galleries.
1.04 PIPING SERVICE
Piping service is determined by the fluid conveyed, regardless of the pipe designation.
For example, pipes designated "Air Low Pressure," "Air High Pressure," and "Air" are
all considered to be in air service.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400500 - GENERAL PIPING
REQUIREMENTS)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 THREAD FORMING FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS
Form threads by means of rolling, not cutting or grinding.
2.02 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPING
A. Bolts and nuts for Class 125 or 150 flanges (including AWWA C207, Class D) located
indoors shall be carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B, hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM
F2329.
B. Bolts and nuts for buried Class 125 or 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel
conforming to ASTM A193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A194 (Grade 8) for nuts.
C. Hex head machine bolts for use with lugged valves shall comply with ASTM A193,
Grade B7.
D. Fit shall be Classes 2A and 2B per ASME B1.1 when connecting to cast-iron valves
having body bolt holes.
E. Provide washers for each nut. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts.
2.03 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
Lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be RAMCO TG-50, Anti-Seize by RAMCO,
Specialty Lubricants Corporation Husky Lube O'Seal, or equal.
2.04 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPING
A. Gaskets for flat face and raised face flanges shall be 1/8-inch thick and shall be one of
the following nonasbestos materials:
1. NSF-61 certified synthetic fiber gasket with rubber binder. Gaskets shall be
suitable for a pressure of 500 psi at a temperature of 180°F. Products: Garlock
Style 3760-U or equal.
2.05 MOLDABLE FILLER TAPE FOR PIPE SURFACE TRANSITION AREAS
A. Filler tape shall be a 100% solids mastic-like butyl-rubber filler designed to fill and
smooth the transition areas between adjacent coating surfaces such as step-down weld
areas, surface irregularities beneath heat-shrink sleeves, pipefittings, and exothermic
welds for cathodic protection bonding wire connections. Characteristics:
1. Thickness per ASTM D1000: 1/8 inch minimum.
2. Peel adhesion to primed pipe: 300 ounces per inch minimum.
3. Elongation: 600% minimum.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400500 - GENERAL PIPING
REQUIREMENTS)
B. Products: Tapecoat “Moldable Sealant,” Polyken No. 939 Filler Tape, or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLING PIPE SPOOLS IN CONCRETE
Install pipes in walls and slabs before placing concrete.
3.02 RAISED FACE AND FLAT FACE FLANGES
Where a raised face flange connects to a flat-faced flange, remove the raised face of the
flange.
3.03 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. Provide pipe supports as detailed in the drawings .
B. Install pipe without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting
valves or equipment.
3.04 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING
A. Set pipe with the flange bolt holes straddling the pipe horizontal and vertical centerline.
Install pipe without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any adjacent connecting
valves or equipment. Before bolting up, align flange faces to the design plane within
1/16 inch per foot measured across any diameter. Align flange bolt holes within 1/8-inch
maximum offset.
B. Inspect each gasket to verify that it is the correct size, material, and type for the specified
service and that it is clean and undamaged. Examine bolts or studs, nuts, and washers for
defects such as burrs or cracks and rust and replace as needed.
C. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and
nuts by wire brushing, lubricate carbon steel bolts with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts
uniformly and progressively.
D. Bolt lengths shall extend completely through their nuts. Any that fail to do so shall be
considered acceptably engaged if the lack of complete engagement is not more than one
thread.
E. Do not use more than one gasket between contact faces in assembling a flanged joint.
F. Tighten the bolts to the manufacturer’s specifications, using the recommended cross bolt
pattern in multiple steps of increasing torque, until the final torque requirements are
achieved. Do not over torque.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL PIPING REQUIREMENTS 400500-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400500 - GENERAL PIPING
REQUIREMENTS)
G. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or
replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints
shall be watertight.
3.05 INSTALLING BLIND FLANGES
A. At outlets not indicated to be connected to valves or to other pipes and to complete the
installed pipeline hydrostatic test, provide blind flanges with bolts, nuts, and gaskets.
B. Coat the inside face of blind flanges per Section 099000, System No. 7.
3.06 INSTALLING GROOVED-END PIPING
A. Install grooved-end pipe and fittings in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's
recommendations and the following.
B. Clean loose scale, rust, oil, grease, and dirt from the pipe or fitting groove before
installing coupling. Apply the coupling manufacturer's gasket lubricant to the gasket
exterior including lips, pipe ends, and housing interiors.
C. Fasten coupling alternately and evenly until coupling halves are seated. Use torques as
recommended by the coupling manufacturer.
3.07 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
Prior to assembly, coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
SECTION 400520 MANUAL VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated valves
including butterfly and ball, valves.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
C. Air-Release and Vacuum-Relief Valves: 400560.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and detail construction sheets showing all valve
parts. Describe each part by material of construction, specification (such as AISI,
ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or type.
C. Show valve dimensions including laying lengths. Show port sizes. Show dimensions and
orientation of valve actuators, as installed on the valves. Show location of internal stops
for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity used to size actuators.
For worm-gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm and
state the handwheel diameter.
D. Show valve linings and coatings. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive
literature.
E. Submit a report verifying that the valve interior linings and exterior coatings have been
tested for holidays and lining thickness. Describe test results and repair procedures for
each valve. Do not ship valves to project site until the reports have been returned by the
Owner's Representative and marked "Resubmittal not required."
F. For butterfly valves, show the clear diameter or size of the port. Show the actual area of
the port as a percentage of the area as calculated for the nominal valve size.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Install valves complete with operating handwheels or levers, gear actuators, and
operating nuts, required for operation.
B. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or molded
onto the valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate.
2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Provide lever or wrench actuators for exposed valves 6 inches and smaller. For larger
valves, provide handwheels.
B. Provide enclosed gear actuators on butterfly valves. Gear actuators for valves 24 inches
and larger shall be of the worm and gear types.
C. Design gear actuators assuming that the differential pressure across the disc is equal to
the pressure rating of the valve and assuming a fluid velocity of 16 fps for valves in
liquid service and a line fluid temperature range of 33°F to 125°F unless otherwise
required in the detailed valve specifications. Size actuators using a minimum safety
factor of 1.5 for valves in open/close service.
D. Gear actuators shall be enclosed, oil lubricated, with seals provided on shafts to prevent
entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Gear actuators for valves located above ground
or in vaults and structures shall have handwheels. The actuators for valves in exposed
service shall contain a dial indicating the position of the valve disc.
E. Self-locking worm gear shall be a one-piece design of gear bronze material (ASTM
B427; or ASTM B84, Alloy C86200), accurately machine cut. Actuators for eccentric
and lubricated plug valves may use ductile-iron gears provided the gearing is totally
enclosed with spring-loaded rubber lip seals on the shafts. The worm shall be hardened
alloy steel (ASTM A322, Grade G41500 or G41400; or ASTM A148, Grade 105-85),
with thread ground and polished. Support worm-gear shaft at each end by ball or tapered
roller bearings. The reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. The handwheel
diameter shall be no more than twice the radius of the gear sector in contact with the
worm. Worm-gear actuators shall be Limitorque Model HBC, EIM Series W, or equal.
F. Valve actuators, handwheels, or levers shall open by turning counterclockwise.
2.03 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGED VALVES
Bolts and nuts for flanged valves shall be as described in Section 400500.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
2.04 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
Gaskets for flanged end valves shall be as described in Section 400500.
2.05 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat metal valves located in structures the same as the adjacent piping. Apply the
specified prime and intermediate coats at the place of manufacture. Apply finish coat in
field. Finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping. Coat handwheels the same
as the valves.
B. Line the interior metal parts of metal valves 4 inches and larger, excluding seating areas
and bronze and stainless steel pieces, per Section 099000, System No. 7. Apply lining at
the place of manufacture.
C. Alternatively, line and coat valves with fusion-bonded epoxy per Section 099761.
D. Test the valve interior linings and exterior coatings at the factory with a low-voltage
(22.5 to 80 volts, with approximately 80,000-ohm resistance) holiday detector, using a
sponge saturated with a 0.5% sodium chloride solution. The lining shall be holiday free.
E. Measure the thickness of the valve interior linings per Section 099000. Repair areas
having insufficient film thickness per Section 099000.
2.06 PACKING, O-RINGS, AND GASKETS
Unless otherwise stated in the detailed valve specifications, packing, O-rings, and
gaskets shall be one of the following nonasbestos materials:
A. Teflon.
B. Kevlar aramid fiber.
C. Acrylic or aramid fiber bound by nitrile. Products: Garlock "Bluegard," Klinger
"Klingersil C4400," or equal.
D. Buna-N (nitrile).
2.07 RUBBER SEATS
Rubber seats shall be made of a rubber compound that is resistant to free chlorine and
monochloramine concentrations up to 10 mg/L in the fluid conveyed.
2.08 VALVES
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
A. Butterfly Valves:
1. Thrust Bearings for Butterfly Valves:
Provide thrust bearings to hold the valve disc in the center of the valve seat. No
bearings shall be mounted inside the valve body within the waterway. Do not use
thrust bearings in which a metal bearing surface on the disc rubs in contact with an
opposing metal surface on the inside of the body.
2. Bronze Components in Butterfly Valves:
Bronze components in contact with water shall comply with the following
requirements:
Constituent Content
Zinc 7% maximum
Aluminum 2% maximum
Lead Lead-Free in
accordance
with NSF/ANSI 372
Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum
3. Port Sizes for Butterfly Valves:
For valves 24 inches and smaller, the actual port diameter shall be at least 93% of
the nominal valve size. For valves larger than 24 inches, the port diameter shall not
be more than 1.25 inches smaller than the nominal valve size. The dimension of
the port diameter shall be the clear waterway diameter plus the thickness of the
rubber seat.
4. Corrosion-Resistant Materials in Butterfly Valves:
Where AWWA C504 requires “corrosion resistant” material, such material shall
be one of the following:
a. Bronze as described above.
b. Type 304 or 316 stainless steel.
c. Monel (UNS N04400).
d. Synthetic nonmetallic material.
5. Seating Surfaces in Butterfly Valves:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
Seating surfaces shall be stainless steel or nickel-copper per AWWA C504 or
nickel-chromium alloy containing a minimum of 72% nickel and a minimum of
14% chromium.
6. Factory Leakage Testing (Types 200, 205, 210, 220, and 240):
Perform factory leakage tests per AWWA C504 on both sides of the seat.
7. Flanged, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 4 Through 72 Inches, Class 150B:
Butterfly valves shall be short body, flanged type for exposed valves and valves in
vaults or structures, and either flanged or mechanical joint for buried valves. Valve
shall conform to AWWA C504, Class 150B. Minimum working differential
pressure across the valve disc shall be 150 psi. Flanged ends shall be Class 125,
ASME B16.1. Valve shafts shall be stub shaft or one-piece units extending
completely through the valve disc. Materials of construction shall be as follows:
Component Material Specification
Body Cast iron AWWA C504
Exposed body cap
screws and bolts and
nuts
Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 304
Discs Cast iron, ductile
iron, or Ni-Resist
AWWA C504
Shafts, disc fasteners,
seat retention
segments, and seat
fastening devices
Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 304
Seat material Buna-N —
Where the rubber seat is applied to the disc, it shall be bonded to a stainless steel
seat retaining ring which is clamped to the disc by Type 304 or 316 stainless steel
screw fasteners or secured to a stainless steel seat by a combination of cap screws,
a serrated disc retaining ring, and molded shoulders in the seat mating with
machined registers in the disc. Valves shall be Pratt, DeZurik Series BAW, or
equal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
B. Ball Valves:
1. Full Port Threaded Bronze Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller (Low Lead):
Ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, for water service shall have a pressure rating of
at least 600 psi WOG at a temperature of 100°F. Provide full port ball and body
design. Valves shall comply with MSS SP-110. Materials of construction shall be
as follows:
Component Material Specification
Body Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C89836
Ball Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C89836 or Alloy
C27450, chromium plated
Ball retainer Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C89836 or
ASTM B371, Alloy C69430
Stem Bronze Alloy C27450
Seats Reinforced Teflon —
Bronze alloys having a maximum lead content in accordance with NSF/ANSI 372,
and with a minimum copper content of 80% may be substituted for the bronze
alloys specified above. Valves shall have threaded ends (ASME B1.20.1),
nonblowout stems, and have plastic-coated lever actuators. Provide locking lever
handle. Valves shall be Apollo 77CLF Series or equal.
2. Double Union CPVC Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller with Vented Ball:
Vented CPVC ball valves, 3 inches and smaller, for chemical service shall be rated
at a pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 105°F and rated at a pressure of 85 psi
at a temperature of 140°F. Provide machined vent hole, deburred, in the ball to
allow gases to vent. Body, ball, and stem shall be CPVC conforming to ASTM
D1784, Type 4, Grade 1. Seats shall be Teflon. O-ring seals shall be Viton for
sodium hypochlorite service and EPDM for sodium hydroxide service. Valve ends
shall be of the double-union design. Ends shall be socket welded except where
threaded or flanged-end valves are specifically shown in the drawings. Valves
shall have handle for manual operation. Valves shall be Plast-O-Matic “Z-MBV-
Vent,” Asahi/America Type 21, or equal.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 VALVE SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
A. Provide flanged openings with metal closures at least 3/16-inch thick, with elastomer
gaskets and at least four full-diameter bolts. Install closures at the place of valve
manufacture prior to shipping. For studded openings, use all the nuts needed for the
intended service to secure closures. Alternatively, ship flanged valves 3 inches and
smaller in separate sealed cartons or boxes.
B. Provide threaded openings with steel caps or solid-shank steel plugs. Do not use
nonmetallic (such as plastic) plugs or caps. Install caps or plugs at the place of valve
manufacture prior to shipping. Alternatively, ship valves having threaded openings or
end connections in separate sealed cartons or boxes.
C. Store resilient seated valves in sealed polyethylene plastic enclosures with a minimum of
one package of desiccant inside. Store resilient seated valves in the open or unseated
position. Valves with adjustable packing glands shall have the packing gland loosened
prior to storage. Inspect valves at least once per week, replace desiccant if required and
repair damaged storage enclosures. Do not store valves with resilient seats near electric
motors or other electrical equipment.
D. Inspect valves on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and
description on the shipping notice and order. Unload valves carefully to the ground
without dropping. Use forklifts or slings under skids. Do not lift valves with slings or
chain around operating shaft, actuator, or through waterway. Lift valves with eyebolts or
rods through flange holes or chain hooks at ends of valve parts.
E. Protect the valve and actuators from weather and the accumulation of dirt, rocks, and
debris. Do not expose rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for more than 30 days. Also, see
the manufacturer’s specific storage instructions.
F. Make sure flange faces, joint sealing surfaces, body seats, and disc seats are clean.
Check the bolting attaching the actuator to the valve for loosening in transit and
handling. If loose, tighten firmly. Open and close valves having manual or power
actuators to make sure the valve operates properly and that stops or limit switches are
correctly set so that the valve seats fully. Close valve before installing.
3.02 FACTORY PRESSURE TESTING
A. Hydrostatically test the valve pressure-containing parts at the factory per the valve
specification or per the referenced standard. If no testing requirement is otherwise
specified or described in the referenced standards, then test with water for 30 minutes
minimum at a pressure of 1.5 times the rated pressure but not less than 20 psig. Test
shall show zero leakage. If leaks are observed, repair the valve and retest. If dismantling
is necessary to correct valve deficiencies, then provide an additional operational test and
verify that the valve components function.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-8
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
B. The chloride content of liquids used to test austenitic stainless steel materials shall not
exceed 50 ppm. To prevent deposition of chlorides as a result of evaporative drying,
remove residual liquid from tested parts at the conclusion of the test.
3.03 INSTALLING VALVES—GENERAL
A. Remove covers over flanged openings and plugs from threaded openings, after valves
have been placed at the point to which the valves will be connected to the adjacent
piping. Do not remove valves from storage cartons or boxes until they are ready to be
installed.
B. Handle valves carefully when positioning, avoiding contact or impact with other
equipment, vault or building walls, or trench walls.
C. Clean valve interiors and adjacent piping of foreign material prior to making up valve to
pipe joint connection. Prepare pipe ends and install valves in accordance with the pipe
manufacturer’s instructions for the joint used. Do not deflect pipe-valve joint. Do not use
a valve as a jack to pull pipe into alignment. The installation procedure shall not result in
bending of the valve/pipe connection with pipe loading.
D. Make sure valve ends and seats are clean. Check exposed bolting for loosening in transit
and handling and tighten to manufacturer’s recommendations. Open and close the valve
to make sure it operates properly and that stops or limit switches are correctly set so that
the vane, ball, gate, needle, diaphragm, disc, plug, or other seating element seats fully.
Close the valve before installing. Check coatings for damage and repair. Handle valves
carefully when positioning, avoiding contact or impact with other equipment or
structures.
E. Prior to assembly, coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant.
3.04 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES
A. Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, install valves in horizontal runs of pipe
having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the floor with their operating
stems vertical. Install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations
between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the floor with their operating stems
horizontal.
B. Install valves on vertical runs of pipe that are next to walls with their stems horizontal,
away from the wall. Valves on vertical runs of pipe that are not located next to walls
shall be installed with their stems horizontal, oriented to facilitate valve operation.
3.05 ASSEMBLING JOINTS
A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the
pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before
installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads
with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. If flanges leak under
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
MANUAL VALVES 400520-9
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400520 - MANUAL, CHECK, AND
PROCESS VALVES)
pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket,
reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight.
B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or
Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.
C. Install lug-type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolt hole and each
flange (two bolts per valve bolt hole).
D. Install grooved-end couplings for valves in accordance with Section 400500.
3.06 MOUNTING GEAR ACTUATORS
The valve manufacturer shall select and mount the gear actuator and accessories on each
valve and stroke the valve from fully open to fully closed prior to shipment.
3.07 FIELD INSTALLATION OF GEAR ACTUATOR
Provide the actuator manufacturer's recommended lubricating oil in each actuator before
commencing the field testing.
3.08 VALVE FIELD TESTING
A. Test valves for leakage at the same time that the connecting pipelines are hydrostatically
tested. See Section 400515 for pressure testing requirements. Protect or isolate any parts
of valves, actuators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less
than the pressure test. Valves shall show zero leakage. Repair or replace any leaking
valves and retest.
B. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves shall
operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. Do not backfill buried
valves until after verifying that valves operate from full open to full closed. If valves
stick or bind, or do not operate from full open to full closed, repair or replace the valve
and repeat the tests.
C. Gear actuators shall operate valves from full open to full close through three cycles
without binding or sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or chainwheel-
operated valves shall not exceed 40 pounds. The torque required to operate valves
having 2-inch AWWA nuts shall not exceed 150 ft-lbs. If actuators stick or bind or if
pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or replace the
actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be fully lubricated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations prior to operating.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES 400560-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400560 - AIR-RELEASE AND
VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES)
SECTION 400560 AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and installation of air and vacuum valves for water
service.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Manual Valves: 400520.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and detail drawings showing all valve parts and
described by material of construction, specification (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, or
CDA), and grade or type. Show linings and coatings.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGED VALVES
See Section 400500 and specification for the pipe to which the valve is attached.
2.02 VALVE DESIGN AND OPERATION
A. Valve design shall comply with AWWA C512, except as modified herein. Class 150
valves shall have a maximum working pressure of at least 150 psi.
B. Air and Vacuum Valves for Water Service:
1. Air and vacuum valves for water service shall have a body with a flanged top
containing the air-release orifice. The float shall rise with the water level in the
valve body to close the orifice by sealing against a synthetic rubber seat.
2. Air and vacuum valves 3 inches and smaller shall have 1/2-inch threaded ports
with bronze plugs in the top cover and near the bottom of the valve body. Air and
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES 400560-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400560 - AIR-RELEASE AND
VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES)
vacuum valves larger than 3 inches shall have a 1-inch threaded drain outlet with
bronze plug near the bottom of the valve body and a 1-inch threaded port with
bronze plug on the side of the valve body above the minimum water level in the
valve which forces the float against the valve seat.
2.03 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Materials of construction for air-release, air and vacuum, and combination air valves for
water service shall be as follows:
Item Material Specification
Body and cover Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 35; or
ASTM A126, Class B
Float, lever or
linkage, air-release
mechanism, poppet,
guide rod, guide
bushings, fasteners,
other internal metal
parts
Stainless steel AISI Type 316
Plugs Bronze See paragraph B below
Seat, plunger, needle Buna-N –
B. Bronze in contact with water shall have the following chemical characteristics:
Constituent Content
Zinc 7% maximum
Aluminum 2% maximum
Lead 8% maximum
Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum
C. Rubber seats shall be made of a rubber compound that is resistant to free chlorine and
monochloramine concentrations up to 10 mg/L in the fluid conveyed.
D. Body and cover bolts, nuts, and cap screws shall be Type 304 stainless steel.
2.04 VALVE END CONNECTIONS
A. Valves 3 inches and larger shall have flanged ends.
B. Flanges for Class 150 valves shall comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125. Flanges for
Class 300 valves shall comply with ASME B16.1, Class 250.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES 400560-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400560 - AIR-RELEASE AND
VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES)
2.05 VALVES
A. Air and Vacuum Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller, Class 300: Valves shall have a maximum
working pressure of 300 psi. Provide threaded outlet above the top cover and orifice.
Valves shall be APCO Series 140; Val-Matic Models 103-S; Crispin AL30; or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Special service conditions for valves shall be as described below. Design the valves to
incorporate the various conditions presented.
Valve
Minimum
Operating
Pressure
(psig)
Maximum
Operating
Pressure
(psig)
Seating
Pressure
(psi)
Filter
Effluent
Manifold
4 6 1
B. Valves shall seat driptight at the specified seating pressure.
3.02 FACTORY TESTING
A. Test each valve per AWWA C512, Section 5 and the following.
B. Hydrostatically test the pressure-containing parts at the factory with water for 30
minutes minimum at a pressure of 1.5 times the rated pressure but not less than 20 psig.
Test shall show zero leakage. If leaks are observed, repair the valve and retest. If
dismantling is necessary to correct valve deficiencies, provide an additional operational
test per AWWA C512, Section 5 for each affected valve.
C. The chloride content of liquids used to test austenitic stainless steel materials shall not
exceed 50 ppm. To prevent deposition of chlorides as a result of evaporative drying,
remove residual liquid from tested parts at the conclusion of the test.
3.03 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat cast-iron valves per Section 099000, System No. 10. Apply the specified coats at
the place of manufacture. Finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping.
B. Coat interior surfaces of cast-iron valves at the place of manufacture per Section 099000,
System No. 7. Do not coat seating areas and plastic, bronze, stainless steel, or other high
alloy parts.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES 400560-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400560 - AIR-RELEASE AND
VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES)
C. Alternatively, line and coat cast-iron valves with fusion-bonded epoxy per Section
099761. Do not coat seating areas and plastic, bronze, stainless steel, or other high alloy
parts.
3.04 SHIPMENT AND STORAGE
A. Identify the equipment with item and serial numbers. Material shipped separately shall
be identified with securely affixed, corrosion-resistant metal tags indicating the item and
serial number of the equipment for which it is intended. In addition, ship crated
equipment with duplicate packing lists, one inside and one on the outside of the shipping
container.
B. Pack and ship one copy of the manufacturer’s standard installation instructions with the
equipment. Provide the instructions necessary to preserve the integrity of the storage
preparation after the equipment arrives at the jobsite and before start-up.
C. Provide flanged openings with metal closures at least 3/16-inch thick, with elastomer
gaskets and at least four full-diameter bolts. Provide closures at the place of pump
manufacture prior to shipping. For studded openings, use all the nuts needed for the
intended service to secure closures.
D. Provide threaded openings with steel caps or solid-shank steel plugs. Do not use
nonmetallic (such as plastic) plugs or caps. Provide caps or plugs at the place of pump
manufacture prior to shipping.
E. Clearly identify lifting points and lifting lugs on the valves. Identify the recommended
lifting arrangement on boxed equipment.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and
nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly
and progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and
bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the
joints. Joints shall be watertight.
B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon® joint compound or
Teflon® tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight.
C. Do not use duct tape and plastic for covering the ends of pipe flanges. Use a solid metal
cover with rubber gasket to cover flange openings during installation. These metal
covers shall remain in place until the piping is connected to the valves.
D. Do not spring flanges of connecting piping into position. Separately work connecting
piping systems into position to bring the piping flanges into alignment with the matching
valve flanges. Do not move valves to achieve piping alignment. Do not use electrical
heating stress relieving to achieve piping alignment.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
AIR-RELEASE AND VACUUM-RELIEF VALVES 400560-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400560 - AIR-RELEASE AND
VACUUM-RELEASE VALVES)
E. Line up pipe flange bolt holes with valve nozzle bolt holes within 1/16 inch maximum
offset from the center of the bolt hole to permit insertion of bolts without applying any
external force to the piping.
F. Flange face separation shall be within the gasket spacing ±1/16 inch. Use only one
gasket per flanged connection.
3.06 VALVE FIELD PRESSURE TESTING
Test valves at the same time that the connecting pipelines are pressure tested. Protect or
isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose
pressure rating is less than the test pressure.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS 400722-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400722 - FLEXIBLE PIPE
COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS)
SECTION 400722 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and installation of flexible gasketed sleeve-type
compression pipe couplings for steel pipe; and couplings for connecting different pipe
materials.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Cold-Applied Wax Tape Coating: 099752.
C. Polyethylene Sheet Encasement (AWWA C105): 099754.
D. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
E. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
F. General Requirements for Steel Piping: 402001.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data on flexible pipe couplings. Show manufacturer's
model or figure number for each type of coupling or joint for each type of pipe material
for which couplings and joints are used. Show coatings.
C. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques to which the coupling bolts shall be
tightened for the flexible gasketed sleeve-type compression pipe couplings.
D. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show dimensions.
E. Show number, size, and material of construction of tie rods and lugs for each thrust
harness on the project.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 COUPLING SYSTEM DESIGN AND COMPONENT UNIT RESPONSIBILITY
The coupling manufacturer shall furnish the gaskets, bolts, nuts, glands, end rings, and
hardware for pipe couplings of all types and shall design these components as an integral
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS 400722-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400722 - FLEXIBLE PIPE
COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS)
system. Design the gaskets for the coupling and appropriately size to provide a
watertight seal at the design pressure and temperature. Ship gaskets, bolts, nuts, glands,
end rings, and hardware for pipe couplings with the pipe coupling and clearly label
indicating the origin of the material, including place and date of manufacture. Package
the manufacturer's printed installation instructions with each pipe coupling.
2.02 CARBON STEEL FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Steel couplings shall have center sleeves and end rings made of carbon steel conforming
to AWWA C219, Section 4. Minimum center sleeve length shall be 5 inches for pipe
sizes 3/4 inch through 4 1/2 inches, 7 inches for pipe sizes 5 inches through 24 inches,
and 10 inches for pipe sizes larger than 24 inches.
B. Sleeve bolts in exposed service shall be carbon steel per AWWA C219, Section 4.
Sleeve bolts in buried service shall be Type 304 stainless steel per AWWA C219,
Section 4.
C. End rings shall be cast, forged, or hot rolled in one piece. Do not use rings fabricated
from two or more shapes.
D. Wall thickness of sleeve shall be at least that specified for the size of pipe in which the
coupling is to be used.
2.03 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS FOR PLAIN-END STEEL PIPE
Couplings shall be steel, Dresser Style 38, Smith-Blair Type 411, Baker Series 200, or
equal.
2.04 TRANSITION COUPLINGS
Couplings for connecting different pipes having different outside diameters shall be
steel: Dresser Style 62 or 162, Smith-Blair Series 413, Baker Series 212 or 220, or equal.
Couplings shall have an internal full circumference ring pipe stop at the midpoint of the
coupling. Inside diameter of coupling pipe stop shall equal inside diameter of smaller
diameter pipe.
2.05 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS 400722-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400722 - FLEXIBLE PIPE
COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SHIPMENT AND STORAGE OF FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Inspect on receipt for damage in shipment and conformance with quantity and
description on the shipping notice and order. Unload carefully to the ground without
dropping. Do not load or unload by inserting forklift tines or lifting chains inside the
waterway. Use nonmetallic slings, padded chains, or padded forklift tines to lift items.
Lift with eyebolts or rods through flange holes or chain hooks at ends.
B. Protect from weather and the accumulation of dirt, rocks, and debris. Do not expose
rubber seats to sunlight or ozone for more than 30 days. Also, see the manufacturer’s
specific storage instructions.
C. Make sure flange faces, joint sealing surfaces, body seats, and disc seats are clean.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from pipe ends. Clean gaskets in flexible pipe couplings
before installing.
B. Do not spring flanges or ends of connecting piping into position. Separately work
connecting piping system into position to bring the piping flanges or ends into alignment
with the matching coupling flanges or joints. Do not move couplings to achieve piping
alignment.
C. Line up pipe flange bolt holes with coupling or joint flange bolt holes within 1/16 inch
maximum offset from the center of the bolt hole to permit insertion of bolts without
applying any external force to the piping.
D. Flange face separation shall be within the gasket spacing ±1/16 inch. Use only one
gasket per flanged connection.
E. Lubricate bolt threads with graphite and oil prior to installation.
3.03 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat buried flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies) and transition
couplings per Section 099000, System No. 21. Coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt threads,
and nuts per Section 099000, System No. 24. Then wrap the couplings with cold-applied
wax tape per Section 099752 and with polyethylene wrap per Section 099754.
B. Coat flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies) and transition
couplings located indoors with the same coating system as specified for the adjacent
pipe. If the adjacent pipe is not coated, coat couplings per Section 099000, System No.
10. Apply prime coat at factory.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS 400722-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400722 - FLEXIBLE PIPE
COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS)
C. Line flexible pipe couplings and segmented sleeve couplings per Section 099000,
System No. 7.
D. Alternatively, line and coat flexible pipe couplings and transition couplings with fusion-
bonded epoxy per Section 099761.
3.04 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Test in accordance with City Standard 77.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
SAFETY SPRAY SHIELDS FOR PIPING CONNECTIONS 400780-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S400780 - SAFETY SPRAY SHIELDS
FOR PIPING CONNECTIONS)
SECTION 400780 SAFETY SPRAY SHIELDS FOR PIPING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and installation of PVC cloth spray shields on pipe
flanges and other piping connections.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit manufacturer’s data sheets showing material of construction and fastening or
installation method and procedure.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PVC CLOTH SAFETY SPRAY SHIELD FOR TUBING, PIPE, AND UNIONS
Safety spray shields shall be reinforced PVC cloth with a clear PTFE strip in the center
for easy visibility to the flange, union, or valve end connections. Provide weep holes
behind a pH-sensitive indicating patch that changes color to red in the presence of an
acid or green in the presence of an alkali. Safety spray shields shall be installed by a
hook and loop fastener and drawstrings. Thread and drawstrings shall be PVC or Teflon.
Operating temperature shall be at least 120°F. Products: Advance Products & Systems,
Inc.; Ramco; or equal.
TPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
Place safety spray shields on the flanges and unions in the piping services as shown on
the drawings.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
SECTION 402001 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes general requirements for materials, fabrication, installation, and
testing of steel pipe.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Flexible Pipe Couplings: 400722.
E. Fabricated Steel Specials: 402050.
F. Fusion Epoxy- Lined and -Coated Steel Pipe: 402057.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit materials list showing material of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and
grade. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced standards, e.g.,
ASTM A53, A135, and A587 and AWWA C200. Provide recertification by an
independent domestic testing laboratory for materials originating outside of the United
States.
C. Submit coating application test records for field measuring paint coating thickness and
holiday detection for each pipe section and fitting. Describe repair procedures used.
1.04 NDT QUALIFICATION
Personnel performing NDT shall meet the requirements of AWWA C200, Section 5 or
shall be qualified as an AWS Certified Welding Inspector (CWI or SCWI) or shall hold
a current AWS Radiographic Interpreter Certification.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 STEEL PIPE CYLINDERS
A. The yield strength of the steel for pipe and fabricated fittings having grooved-end joints
shall be minimum 35,000 psi.
B. Provide seamless pipe or pipe having straight longitudinal weld seams where pipe passes
through rubber annular sealing devices. Alternatively, grind the exterior weld seams of
spiral welded pipe flush with the exterior pipe surface where the pipe passes through the
rubber annular sealing devices.
2.02 FITTINGS
See Section 402050.
2.03 JOINTS
A. Provide plain-end pipe where flexible pipe couplings are to be provided.
B. Where piping connects to valves, the pipe ends shall match the ends of the valves.
2.04 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES
A. Outlets of size 3 inches and smaller shall be of the thredolet type, per MSS SP-97 and
AWWA Manual M11 (2004 edition), Figure 13-26. Outlets shall be 3,000-pound WOG
forged steel per ASTM A105 or ASTM A216, Grade WCB. Threads shall comply with
ASME B1.20.1. Outlets shall be Bonney Forge Co. "Thredolet," Allied Piping Products
Co. "Branchlet," or equal.
B. Alternatively, threaded openings not less than 2 inches or more than 3 inches in nominal
size shall be a flat-bottom half-coupling conforming to ASME B16.11, Class 3000 and
AWWA Manual M11 (2004 edition), Figure 13-25. Where the mounting surface is
curved to a diameter of 36 inches or less, the mounting diameter shall be the same as that
of the surface upon which it is to be mounted. Forge the threaded outlet and its plug
from steel conforming to ASTM A105 or ASTM A181, Class 70.
C. For outlets 3 inches and smaller in piping smaller than 4 inches, use a tee with a threaded
outlet.
D. For outlets larger than 3 inches, use a tee with a flanged outlet.
2.05 GROOVED-END COUPLINGS
A. Grooved-end couplings shall be ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18 or 65-45-12.
Gaskets shall conform to ASTM D2000 and be EPDM.
B. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A183, 110,000-psi tensile strength.
Bolts in buried or submerged service shall be ASTM A193, Grade B8, Class 2.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
C. Couplings for connecting to grooved-end valves shall be Victaulic Style 44 or 77 to
match the valve ends.
D. Grooved-end adapter flanges for pipe 18 inches and smaller having a maximum test
pressure of 200 psi shall comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125 dimensions. Flanges shall
be Victaulic Style 741 or 742, Gustin-Bacon Figure 154, or equal.
2.06 FLANGES
A. Forged flange material shall conform to ASTM A105, A 181, or A 182. Steel flange
material shall conform to ASTM A283 (Grade C or D), A285 (Grade C), or A36.
B. Flanges shall comply with AWWA C207, Class D or E as follows. Use welding neck
flanges conforming to ASME B16.5 in piping 10 inches and smaller where connecting to
lug or wafer-style valves and in all sizes where connecting to wrought steel elbows and
tees. Flanges shall be flat faced. Use the following pressure classes of flanges based on
the specified test pressures:
Test Pressure
(psi)
Pipe Size
(inches)
Flange Pressure
Class
175 and less 4 to 12 Class D
175 to 200 4 to 12 Class E
150 and less 14 to 144 Class D
150 to 200 14 to 144 Class E
C. Provide flat-faced flanges as described above where connecting to cast-iron flanges and
where otherwise indicated.
D. Blind flanges shall comply with AWWA C207, Table 7.
2.07 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
2.08 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 400500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND ERECTION
A. Beveled ends for butt-welding shall conform to ASME B16.25. Remove slag by
chipping or grinding. Surfaces shall be clean of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, and other
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
material detrimental to welding. When welding the reverse side, chip out slag before
welding.
B. Fabrication shall comply with ASME B31.3, Chapter V. Welding procedure and
performance qualifications shall be in accordance with Section IX, Articles II and III,
respectively, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. The minimum number of passes for welded joints shall be as follows:
Steel Cylinder Thickness
(inch)
Minimum Number of
Passes for Welds
Less than 0.1875 1
0.1875 through 0.25 2
Greater than 0.25 3
Welds shall be full penetration.
D. Use the shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) submerged arc welding (SAW), gas-
shielded flux-cored arc welding (FCAW), or gas-metal arc welding (GMAW) process
for shop welding. Use the SMAW process for field welding.
E. Welding preparation shall comply with ASME B31.3, paragraph 328.4. Limitations on
imperfections in welds shall conform to the requirements in ASME B31.3, Table 341.3.2
and paragraph 341.4 for visual examination.
F. Identify welds in accordance with ASME B31.3, paragraph 328.5.
G. Clean each layer of deposited weld metal prior to depositing the next layer of weld
metal, including the final pass, by a power-driven wire brush.
H. Welding electrodes for carbon steel piping shall comply with AWS A5.1, A5.17, A5.18,
A5.20, or A5.23. Carbon steel flux cored wire shall have a maximum boron content of
0.006%.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT FOR SPECIALS
See Section 402050.
3.03 SHOP TESTING OF FABRICATED OR WELDED COMPONENTS
A. After completion of fabrication and welding in the shop and prior to the application of
any lining or coating, test each component according to the referenced standards. Test
fabricated fittings per AWWA C200. Test the seams in fittings that have not been
previously shop hydrostatically tested by the dye penetrant method as described in
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Appendix 8 and Section V,
Article 6. In lieu of the dye penetrant method of testing, completed fittings may be
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
hydrostatically tested. Use the field hydrostatic test pressure or 125% of the design
pressure, whichever is higher.
3.04 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 400500.
3.06 INSTALLING GROOVED-END PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.07 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.08 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING
A. Install in accordance with Section 312316.
3.09 APPLICATION OF MORTAR FOR REPAIRING EXISTING MORTAR-LINED AND
-COATED STEEL PIPE
A. Remove deteriorated mortar surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, and bond-inhibiting materials.
Repair area shall be at least 1/8-inch deep. The exposed aggregate surface shall have a
minimum surface profile of ±1/16 inch. Clean surface by saturating with clean water.
Then allow to dry such that there is no standing water during mortar application. Apply
primer.
B. Scrub repair mortar into the substrate, filling pores and voids. Apply mortar material
against the edge of the area to be repaired, working toward the center. After filling
repair, consolidate and then screed. Apply mortar in multiple lifts to the thickness
necessary to match the thickness of the mortar lining or coating. Where multiple lifts are
required, score the top surface of each lift to produce a roughened surface for the next
lift. Allow the preceding lift to reach final set per the mortar manufacturer’s
recommended minimum time before applying additional mortar material. Saturate
surface of the lift with clean water. Scrub fresh mortar into the preceding lift. Allow
mortar to set and then finish for a smooth surface.
C. Moist cure with wet burlap and polyethylene, a fine mist of water, or water-based curing
compound. Commence curing immediately after finishing the final mortar lift. Protect
mortar from direct sunlight, wind, rain, and frost.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
3.10 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Hydrostatically test pipe and fittings in the field in accordance with City Standard 77.
3.11 PAINTING AND COATING
A. Coat pipe located above ground and buried with fusion-bonded epoxy per Section
099761. Color code above ground piping with adjacent piping in accordance with
Section 099000, System No. 66.
B. Pipe that is to be encased in concrete shall have no coating, unless shown otherwise in
the drawings.
C. Coat the ends of plain-end buried pipe where flexible pipe couplings are to be installed
per Section 099000, System No. 7. Apply coating in shop.
D. The coating thickness on pipe ends having grooved-end joints (gasket seating surface
and the entire groove) and on the coupling key, shoulder, gasket pocket, and bolt pad
mating surfaces of the groove-end couplings shall be 8 to 10 mils.
E. Coat exposed grooved-end couplings with fusion-bonded epoxy per Section 099761.
F. Coat the interior metal surfaces of blind flanges per Section 099000, System No. 7.
3.12 FIELD THICKNESS MEASUREMENT AND REPAIR OF PAINT COATINGS FOR
STEEL PIPE
A. Field repair shop applied prime coats per Section 099000.
B. Test linings and coatings per ASTM G62, Method B, with a holiday detector set at 125
volts per mil coating thickness. Repair holidays and pinholes by applying the prime,
intermediate, and finish coatings to each holiday or pinhole and retest.
C. Measure the lining and coating thickness on each pipe section using a calibrated coating
thickness gauge. Make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings)
spaced evenly over every 15 linear feet (or fraction thereof) to be measured. Make three
gauge readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the
probe a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each new gauge reading. Discard any unusually high
or low gauge reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average (mean) of
the three gauge readings as the spot measurement. The average of five spot
measurements for each area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot
measurement in any area shall be less than 80%, or more than 120%, of the specified
thickness. One of three readings that are averaged to produce each spot measurement
may underrun by a greater amount. If a section of the pipe, item, or piece of equipment
does not meet these criteria, remove the entire lining or coating and recoat the entire
item or piece of equipment.
D. Thickness determination shall meet the following requirements:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING 402001-7
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402001 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS FOR STEEL PIPING)
1. No individual reading shall be below 75% of specified thickness.
2. Individual spot readings (consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches
of each other) shall have an average not less than 80% of specified thickness.
3. The average of all spot readings shall be equal to or greater than nominal thickness
specified.
E. Thickness determinations shall be conducted using a Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge
as described in SSPC PA2 specification.
F. If the item has an insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat the surface with the
specified finish coatings to obtain the specified coverage. Sandblast or power-sand
visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded coating, feathering the edges. Then coat in
accordance with the specifications. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or
other imperfections.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
SECTION 402050 FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials and fabrication of steel pipe specials of sizes 4 through
30 inches, in accordance with AWWA C200, C205, and C208 and the following options
and restrictions, for use in manifold piping facilities.
1.02 SPECIALS
A special is defined as any piece of pipe other than a normal full-length straight section.
This includes but is not limited to elbows, manhole sections, short pieces, reducers,
adapter sections with special ends, sections with outlets, etc.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. General Requirements for Steel Piping: 402001.
E. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy-Lined and -Coated Steel Pipe: 402057.
F. PVC Distribution Pipe (14 Inches and Larger): 402093.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit drawings for fabricated steel specials showing dimensions, wall thickness,
reinforcing at openings, type of coating, and lining. Label or number each special and
provide the following information:
1. Material of construction, with ASTM or API reference and grade.
2. Paint primer coating, where primer coat is required.
3. Weld sizes and dimensions of grooved-end collars, flanges, reinforcing collars,
wrapper plates, and crotch plates.
C. Submit affidavit of compliance with referenced standards (e.g., AWWA C208, ASTM
A53, etc.).
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
D. Submit welding procedure specifications (WPS) and procedure qualification records
(PQR) for each welding process and welder qualification records (WQR) for each
welder and welding operator.
E. Submit certified original copies of mill test reports on each sheet from which steel is
rolled. Tests shall include physical and chemical properties. Submit certified original
copies of mill test reports for flanges including details of stress relief used. Submit
manufacturer's certificates of compliance with referenced pipe standards, e.g., ASTM
A53, ASTM A135, API 5L. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing
laboratory for materials originating outside of the United States.
F. Submit dimensional check reports on each steel pipe special after fabrication.
G. Submit manufacturer's certificates of welding consumables used for shop and field
welding.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 FITTINGS AND SPECIALS
A. Provide fusion-bonded epoxy lined and coated fabricated steel fittings.
B. Ends of the fittings shall be compatible with the pipe joint for the particular type of pipe
to which the steel fittings or specials connect.
2.02 STEEL FITTINGS
A. A fitting is defined as a special piece of pipe other than a normal straight section.
Elbows, tees, crosses, manhole sections, reducers, and sections with outlets are fittings.
B. Unless stated otherwise in the detailed pipe specifications, fittings shall comply with
ASME B16.9 or AWWA C208, as follows:
1. Specials and wrought steel butt-welded fittings 4 through 10 inches shall comply
with ASME B16.9. Wall thickness shall be standard weight per ASME B36.10.
Material for carbon steel fittings shall comply with ASTM A234, Grade WPB.
Elbows shall be of the long-radius type unless otherwise shown in the drawings.
2. For tees, comply with ASME B16.9 or AWWA C208, Figure 1 and Table 1.
Minimum wall thickness for fittings smaller than 12 inches shall be standard
weight per ASME B36.10. Minimum wall thickness for fittings 12 inches and
larger shall be the same as specified for the pipe cylinder in Section 402057.
3. For reducers, comply with AWWA C208, Section 4. Reducers complying with
ASME B16.9 may also be used. Minimum wall thickness for fittings smaller than
12 inches shall be standard weight per ASME B36.10. Minimum wall thickness
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
for fittings 12 inches and larger shall be the same as specified for the pipe cylinder
in Section 402057.
4. For mitered elbows 42 inches and smaller, provide a minimum radius of 2.5 times
the pipe diameter (2.5D) unless otherwise indicated. Provide the number of pieces
and wall thicknesses "t" as tabulated below:
Class A
(degrees)
Class B
(degrees)
No. of
Pieces
0 to 30 0 to 22.5 2
31 to 60 22.5 to 45 3
61 to 90 45 to 67.5 4
67.5 to 90 5
Design Internal Pressure (psi)
Pipe Nominal
Diameter
(inches) 125 or Less
More Than 125
but Less Than or
equal to 200
More Than 200 but
Less Than or equal
to Pmax
20 and less Class A
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class A
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class A
(Pmax = 300 psi)
(t = 0.375 in.)
More than 20 but
less than or equal to
30
Class A
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class A
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class B
(Pmax = 300 psi)
(t = 0.375 in.)
More than 30 but
less than or equal to
36
Class A
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class B
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class B
(Pmax = 250 psi)
(t = 0.500 in.)
More than 36 but
less than or equal to
42
Class B
(t = 0.375 in.)
Class B
(t = 0.50 in.)
---
5. Locate field-welded lap joints no closer than 4 feet 0 inches to a miter.
C. If no design pressure is shown in the drawings, assume the design pressure to be 25 psi
less than the test pressure, with a minimum design pressure of 100 psi.
D. Material for fabricated carbon steel fittings 12 through 30 inches in diameter shall be the
same as the pipe or shall comply with ASTM A283 (Grade C or D), ASTM A36, ASTM
A572 (all grades), ASTM A1011, or ASTM A1018. Material for fabricated fittings
larger than 30 inches shall be the same as the pipe or shall comply with ASTM A572 (all
grades), ASTM A1011, or ASTM A1018. Carbon content: 0.25% maximum.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
E. Maximum circumferential stress at the design pressure: 40% of minimum yield stress.
Minimum wall thickness of steel fittings other than mitered elbows shall be the same as
the pipe of same size per ASME B36.10.
2.03 FLANGES
See Section 402001.
2.04 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
2.05 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES IN STEEL SPECIALS
See Section 402001.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND ERECTION OF STEEL SPECIALS
See Section 402001.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT FOR FITTINGS 42 INCHES AND SMALLER
A. The requirement for additional reinforcement of fabricated fittings at branches and
openings shall be determined by the procedure given in ASME B31.3, paragraph 304.3
and Appendix H. If additional reinforcement is required, it shall be accomplished as
described below.
B. Select the type of reinforcement for fittings with outlets from the following table:
R = ID outlet
ID main run x sinB
where B = Angle between the longitudinal axis of the main run and
the branch
R Type of Reinforcement
Maximum of 0.5 Collar
Maximum of 0.7 Wrapper Plate
No limit Crotch Plate
When outlets are located opposite each other in a special (i.e., a cross), the limiting
values of "R" shall be 0.25 and 0.35, respectively.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
3.03 COLLAR REINFORCEMENT
A. For collar reinforcement, select an effective shoulder width "W" of a collar from the
inside surface of the steel outlet to the outside edge of the collar, measured on the
surface of the cylinder of the main run, such that:
W = (1/3 to 1/2) x ID outlet
sinB
B. For collar reinforcement of tangential outlets, use
runmainOD
outletODSinB
C. The minimum thickness "T" of the collar is determined by:
T = P x ID main run x ID outlet x (2 - sinB)
4 x F x W x sinB
where:
P = Design pressure
F = Allowable design stress
= 40% of minimum yield stress
B = As in Part 2 above.
D. Collars may be oval in shape or rectangular with rounded corners.
3.04 WRAPPER PLATE REINFORCEMENT
For a wrapper plate, use the above collar formula except that the wrapper is of thickness
"T," its total width is (2W + ID outlet/sinB), and it extends entirely around the main pipe
diameter portion of the steel fitting.
3.05 CROTCH PLATE REINFORCEMENT
Base crotch plate design on Swanson, H.S. et al., Design of Wye Branches for Steel
Pipes, summarized in AWWA M11 (2004 edition), Chapter 13.
3.06 SHOP TESTING OF FABRICATED SPECIALS
See Section 402001.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FABRICATED STEEL SPECIALS 402050-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402050 - FABRICATED STEEL
SPECIALS)
3.07 HYDROSTATIC, RADIOGRAPHIC, ULTRASONIC, SOAP AND COMPRESSED
AIR, LIQUID PENETRANT, AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE TEST METHODS
See Section 402001.
3.08 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING
See Section 402001.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
SECTION 402057 FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, fabrication, installation, and testing of fusion-bonded
epoxy-lined and -coated steel pipe in potable water service having a maximum design
pressure of 300 psi for manifold piping in facilities.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
C. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting: 312316.
D. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
E. Flexible Pipe Couplings and Expansion Joints: 400722.
F. General Requirements for Steel Piping: 402001.
G. Fabricated Steel Specials: 402050.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 402001.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Apply fusion-bonded epoxy lining and coating to steel pipe per AWWA C213 except as
modified herein. The pipe or fitting size in inches refers to the pipe size per ASME
B36.10.
B. The Contractor shall require the pipe supplier to provide bare pipe that is free of salts,
oil, and grease to the coating applicator.
2.02 STEEL PIPE CYLINDERS
A. Steel pipe 18 inches and smaller in diameter shall be API 5L, Grade B; ASTM A53
(Type E or S), Grade B; ASTM A106, Grade B; or ASTM A135, Grade B.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
B. Steel pipe larger than 18 inches in diameter shall be API 5L, Grade B; ASTM A106,
Grade B; ASTM A135, Grade B; ASTM A134; or AWWA C200 or shall comply with
the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B. Pipe conforming to ASTM A134 or to
AWWA C200 shall be made of steel conforming to ASTM A283, Grade C or D, or
ASTM A285, Grade C.
C. Pipes shall be standard weight per ASME B36.10.
D. See Section 402001 for additional requirements.
2.03 SHOP-APPLIED EPOXY LINING AND COATING
See Section 099761.
2.04 SHOP- AND FIELD-APPLIED EPOXY COATING FOR PATCHING
See Section 099761.
2.05 FITTINGS
A. A fitting is defined as a special piece of pipe other than a normal straight section.
Elbows, manhole sections, reducers, and sections with outlets are fittings. See Sections
402001 and 402050.
B. Fittings 2 through 12 inches shall be grooved-end, ductile iron (ASTM A536) or steel
(ASTM A53, Grade B).
C. Fittings 14 inches and larger shall be in accordance with Sections 402001 and 402050
and the following:
For wrought (smooth) elbows, provide long radius elbows per ASME B16.9 with a
minimum wall thickness of 0.375 inch.
D. Grooved-end fittings smaller than 24 inches shall be square-cut grooved, flexible type,
with the groove dimensions as shown in AWWA C606, Table 3. Grooved-end fittings 24
inches and larger shall have AWWA C606 Type "D" collars for use with the grooved-
end couplings.
2.06 JOINTS
A. Joints for exposed pipe shall be as shown on the drawings .
B. Buried joints shall be plain end with flexible pipe couplings per Section 400722.
C. Grooved-end joints for pipes 20 inches and smaller shall be flexible, square-cut grooved,
per AWWA C606, Table 3. Grooved-end joints for pipes 24 inches and larger shall have
AWWA C606 Type "D" collars.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
D. Do not field weld to join pipe and fittings. If connections in addition to those shown in
the drawings are required to field join pieces, use either flanged or grooved-end joints.
E. See Section 402001 for additional requirements.
2.07 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES
See Section 402001.
2.08 GROOVED-END COUPLINGS
A. See Section 402001.
B. Couplings for pipe smaller than 24 inches shall be flexible type, square-cut grooved, per
AWWA C606: Victaulic Style 77, Gustin-Bacon Figure 100, or equal. Use Victaulic
Style 44 couplings, or equal, for pipe 24 inches and larger having AWWA C606 Type
"D" collars.
C. Line and coat grooved-end couplings the same as the pipe. Color shall match the color of
the pipe fusion epoxy coating.
2.09 FLANGES
See Section 402001.
2.10 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
2.11 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS
See Section 400500.
2.12 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND ERECTION
See Section 402001.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT
See Section 402001.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
3.03 SHOP TESTING OF FABRICATED OR WELDED COMPONENTS
See Section 402001.
3.04 SHOP APPLICATION OF FUSION EPOXY LINING AND COATING
A. Apply lining and coating per AWWA C213 and Section 099761.
3.05 FACTORY TESTING OF LINING AND COATING
A. Test lining and coating with a low-voltage wet sponge holiday detector in accordance
with AWWA C213, Section 5.3.3 and Section 099761. If the number of holidays or
pinholes exceeds one per 20 square feet for pipe smaller than 14-inch outside diameter
or one per 6 linear feet of pipe length for pipe 12 inches and smaller, remove the entire
pipe lining and coating and recoat the entire pipe or fitting.
3.06 QUALITY OF LINING AND COATING APPLICATION
The cured lining or coating shall be smooth and glossy, with no graininess or roughness.
The lining or coating shall have no blisters, cracks, bubbles, underfilm voids, mechanical
damage, discontinuities, or holidays.
3.07 SHOP REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
A. Apply a two-part epoxy coating to defective linings and coatings to areas smaller than 20
square inches. Patched areas shall overlap the parent or base coating a minimum of 0.5
inch. If a defective area exceeds 20 square inches, remove the entire lining and coating
and recoat.
B. Prepare the defective area per SSPC SP-10 or SP-11T. Lightly abrade or sandblast the
pipe coating and lining on either side of the area before applying the liquid epoxy
coating. Apply the liquid epoxy coating to a minimum dry-film thickness of 15 mils.
3.08 SHIPPING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When loading piping, fittings, couplings, or other coated items for shipment to the
project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate pipes or other coated
items to prevent damaging the coated surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood
spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the coated surfaces after
separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded pipe or other coated
items and minimize damage.
B. Do not load or unload pipe, fittings, couplings, or other coated items by inserting forklift
tines or lifting chains inside the pipe or item. Use nonmetallic slings, padded chains, or
padded forklift tines to lift pipe or other coated items.
C. Cover piping or other coated items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to
prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
D. Provide stulls, braces, and supports for piping during shipping and storage such that out-
of-roundness or deflection does not exceed 0.5% of the pipe diameter.
E. Handle piping and other coated items with care during the unloading, installation, and
erection operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store pipe or other coated items
on the ground or on top of other work unless ground or work is covered with a protective
covering or tarpaulin. Place pipe or other coated items above the ground upon platforms,
skids, or other supports.
F. Store piping or other coated items at the site on pallets to prevent direct contact with
ground or floor. Cover pipe or coated items during storage with protective coverings or
tarpaulins to prevent deposition of rainwater, salt air, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.
G. Do not allow piping or other coated items to contact metal, concrete, or other surfaces
during storage, handling, or installation and erection at the site that could damage or
scratch the coating.
3.09 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 400500.
3.11 INSTALLING GROOVED-END PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.12 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
See Section 400500.
3.13 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING
A. Install in accordance with Sections 312316 and 402001 and as follows. Inspect the
interior and exterior protective coating, and repair damaged areas in the field with the
coating manufacturer's field repair kit.
B. Use only fabric straps to lift pipe; do not use chains or cables.
3.14 FIELD PRESSURE TESTING
Test in accordance with City Standard 77.
3.15 PAINTING EXPOSED PIPING
Coat per Section 099000, System No. 66.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
FUSION EPOXY-LINED AND -COATED STEEL PIPE 402057-6
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402057 - FBE STEEL PIPE)
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER 402090-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402090 - PVC LESS THAN 3
INCHES)
SECTION 402090 PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, installation, and testing of PVC pipe and fittings of size
3 inches and smaller for use in process piping having a maximum design pressure of 150
psi and having a maximum design temperature of 105°F.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Painting and Coating: 099000.
B. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting: 312316.
C. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
D. Manual, Check, and Process Valves: 400520.
E. PVC Distribution Pipe (14 Inches and Larger): 402093.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Submit materials list showing materials of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and
grade. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced standards, e.g.,
ASTM D1784, D1785, and D2467. Show wall thickness of pipe and fittings. Show
fitting dimensions.
C. Submit data sheets for solvent cement demonstrating compliance with ASTM D2564
and F656.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PIPE
Pipe shall be Schedule 80, Type I, Grade 1 (Class 12454-B), conforming to ASTM
D1784 and D1785.
2.02 FITTINGS
Fittings shall be Schedule 80 and shall conform to ASTM D2464 for threaded fittings
and ASTM D2467 for socket-type fittings.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER 402090-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402090 - PVC LESS THAN 3
INCHES)
2.03 FLANGES
PVC flanges shall be of the one-piece solid socket design and shall be made of the same
material as the pipe. Pressure rating shall be at least 150 psi at a temperature of 73°F.
Minimum burst pressure shall be 500 psi. Flanges shall match the dimensions of ASME
B16.5, Class 150, steel flanges for outside diameter, bolt circle, and bolt holes. Do not
use Van Stone flanges.
2.04 UNIONS
A. Unions shall have socket-type ends, Viton O-rings for sodium hypochlorite service,
EPDM O-rings for sodium hydroxide service, and shall be Schedule 80. Material shall
be Type I, Grade 1 PVC, per ASTM D1784.
B. Union connections to other metal piping materials shall comply with MSS SP-107. The
fitting end for connection to PVC pipe shall be a female socket. Provide wrought or cast
copper tailpieces for connection to copper piping and tubing. Provide Type 316 stainless
steel tailpieces for connection to steel piping.
2.05 JOINTS
Pipe and fitting joints shall be socket welded except where threaded and flanged joints
are required to connect to valves and equipment.
2.06 SOLVENT CEMENT IN OTHER THAN SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE SERVICE
Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D2564 and F656.
2.07 SOLVENT CEMENT IN SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE SERVICE
Solvent cement shall be free of silica. Products: IPS “Weld-On” PVC 724 or Oatey “Lo
V.O.C. PVC Heavy Duty Gray.”
2.08 GASKETS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
2.09 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES
See Section 400500.
2.10 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 400500.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER 402090-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402090 - PVC LESS THAN 3
INCHES)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Do not install PVC pipe when the temperature is below 40°F or above 90°F. Store loose
pipes on racks with a maximum support spacing of 3 feet. Provide shades for pipe stored
outdoors or installed outdoors until the pipe is filled with water.
B. Store fittings indoors in their original cartons.
C. Store solvent cement indoors or, if outdoors, shade from direct sunlight exposure. Do not
use solvent cements that have exceeded the shelf life marked on the storage container.
D. Before installation, check pipe and fittings for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling, kinking,
or splitting on pipe ends. Remove any pipe section containing defects by cutting out the
damaged section of pipe.
E. Do not drag PVC pipe over the ground, drop it onto the ground, or drop objects on it.
3.02 SOLVENT-WELDED JOINTS
A. Prior to solvent welding, remove fittings and couplings from their cartons and expose
them to the air at the same temperature conditions as the pipe for at least one hour.
B. Cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs, chips, and filings before joining pipe or
fittings. Bevel solvent-welded pipe ends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
C. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the inside and outside of the pipe end and the
inside of the fitting before applying solvent cement. Clean the surfaces of both pipes and
fittings that are to be solvent welded with a clean cloth moistened with acetone or
methylethyl ketone. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces.
D. The pipe and fitting socket shall have an interference fit. Perform a dry fit test at each
joint before applying solvent cement. The pipe shall enter the fitting socket between one-
third and two-thirds of the full socket depth when assembled by hand.
E. Make up solvent-welded joints per ASTM D2855. Application of cement to both
surfaces to be joined and assembly of these surfaces shall produce a continuous bond
between them with visual evidence of cement at least flush with the outer end of the
fitting bore around the entire joint perimeter.
F. Allow at least eight hours of drying time before moving solvent-welded joints or
subjecting the joints to any internal or external loads or pressures.
G. Acceptance criteria for solvent-welded joints shall be as follows:
1. Unfilled Areas in Joint: None permitted.
2. Unbonded Areas in Joint: None permitted.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER 402090-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402090 - PVC LESS THAN 3
INCHES)
3. Protrusion of Material into Pipe Bore, Percent of Pipe Wall Thickness: Cement,
50%.
3.03 FLANGED JOINTS
A. Lubricate carbon steel bolt threads with graphite and oil before installation.
B. Tighten bolts on PVC flanges by tightening the nuts diametrically opposite each other
using a torque wrench. Complete tightening shall be accomplished in stages and the final
torque values shall be as shown in the following table:
Pipe Size
(inches)
Final Torque
(foot-pounds)
1/2 to 1 1/2 10 to 15
2 to 3 20 to 30
3.04 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS
See Section 400500.
3.05 ASSEMBLING THREADED JOINTS
A. Cut threaded ends on PVC to the dimensions of ASTM F1498. Ends shall be square cut.
Follow the pipe manufacturer's recommendations regarding pipe hold-down methods,
saw cutting blade size, and saw cutting speed. Gauges, gauge tolerances, and gauging
procedures shall comply with ASTM F1498, Sections 7 and 8. Perform field gauging on
every field-cut threaded connection.
B. Pipe or tubing cutters shall be specifically designed for use on PVC pipe. Use cutters
manufactured by Reed Manufacturing Company, Ridge Tool Company, or equal.
C. If a hold-down vise is used when the pipe is cut, insert a rubber sheet between the vise
jaws and the pipe to avoid scratching the pipe.
D. Thread cutting dies shall be clean and sharp and shall not be used to cut materials other
than plastic.
E. Apply Teflon® thread compound or Teflon® tape lubricant to threads before screwing
on the fitting.
F. Assemble threaded flanges and fittings per ASTM F1498, Sections 4, 7, and 8. Do not
tighten threaded connections more than two turns past finger tightness for both internal
and external threads.
3.06 INSTALLING UNIONS
Provide unions on exposed piping 3 inches and smaller as follows:
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC PIPE, 3 INCHES AND SMALLER 402090-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402090 - PVC LESS THAN 3
INCHES)
A. At every change in direction (horizontal and vertical).
B. 6 to 12 inches downstream of valves.
C. Every 40 feet in straight pipe runs.
D. Where shown in the drawings.
3.07 INSTALLING BURIED PIPE
A. Install in accordance with Section 312316 and as follows.
B. Trench bottom shall be continuous, smooth, and free of rocks. See the details in the
drawings for trench dimensions, pipe bedding, and backfill.
C. After the pipe has been solvent-welded and the joints have set, snake the pipe in the
trench per the pipe manufacturer's recommendations in order to allow for thermal
expansion and contraction of the pipe.
D. Do not backfill the pipe trench until the solvent-welded joints have set. Support the pipe
uniformly and continuously over its entire length on firm, stable soil. Do not use
blocking to change pipe grade or to support pipe in the trench.
E. Install buried PVC pipe in accordance with ASTM D2774 and the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. Backfill materials in the pipe zone shall be imported sand per Section
312316.
3.08 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING
A. See Section 400500.
B. Fill empty piping with water and provide temporary shading or other means to keep the
surface temperature of the pipe below 100°F.
END OF SECTION
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER) 402093-1
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402093 - PVC PIPE)
SECTION 402093 PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
This section includes materials, installation, and testing of PVC pipe having cast-iron
pipe outside diameters and otherwise conforming to AWWA C900, as modified herein.
Size range is 14 through 36 inches. The pipe diameters shown in the drawings shall
correspond to the following standard dimension ratios (SDRs):
Size Range
(inches)
Pressure Class
(psi)
SDR per ASTM
D2241
14 to 24 165 25
30 to 36 165 25
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting: 312316.
B. Cold-Applied Wax Tape Coating: 099752.
C. Polyethylene Sheet Encasement (AWWA C105): 099754.
D. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Linings and Coatings: 099761.
E. General Piping Requirements: 400500.
F. Flexible Pipe Couplings: 400722.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Special Provisions.
B. Provide affidavit that the pipe complies with AWWA C900.
C. Submit manufacturer's catalog data, outline drawings, and material description of service
connection saddles, corporation stops, and pipe plugs.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.01 PIPE
Material shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-A or 12454-B. Provide National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval for potable water service.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER) 402093-2
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402093 - PVC PIPE)
2.02 JOINTS
Provide elastomeric seal joints conforming to ASTM D3139. Elastomeric gaskets shall
comply with ASTM F477.
2.03 SAND FOR PIPE ZONE MATERIAL
See Section 312316.
2.04 RESTRAINED JOINTS
Provide restrained joints where indicated in the drawings. Restrained joints shall be
provided by restraining systems that incorporate a series of machined serrations on the
inside diameter of a restraint ring to provide positive restraint. Restraining systems shall
meet or exceed the requirements of UNI-B-13-94 and ASTM F1674 and the following:
A. Restraint devices for bell-and-spigot joints shall consist of a split restraint ring installed
on the spigot, connected to a solid backup ring seated behind the bell.
B. Restraint devices for connection to ductile-iron mechanical joints shall consist of a split
restraint ring installed behind the ductile-iron fitting follower gland and gasket and shall
retain the full deflection capability of the joint.
C. The split restraint ring shall be machined to match the outside diameter of the pipe,
provide full 360-degree support around the barrel of the pipe, and shall incorporate a
series of machined serrations for gripping the outside surface of the pipe. The serrations
shall be uniform and extend the full circumference of the clamp. The ring shall also
incorporate a positive means of avoiding applying excessive clamping force to the pipe.
D. Materials used in the restraint device shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536,
Grade 60-42-12 or 65-45-12.
E. T-bolts, studs, and connecting hardware shall be high-strength, low alloy material in
accordance with AWWA C111.
F. Design restraining devices to have a 2:1 safety factor based on the design strength of the
pipe.
G. Restraining devices shall be UNI-Flange Block Buster Series 1300 or 1500, EBAA Iron
Series 2800, or equal.
2.05 FACTORY TESTING OF PIPE
Upon request provide the following test reports:
A. Test the quick-burst strength of pipe produced from each extrusion outlet at the
beginning of production of each specific material, style, or size; thereafter, test one
sample every 24 hours. Test a minimum of five specimens total. Test in accordance with
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER) 402093-3
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402093 - PVC PIPE)
ASTM D1599. For bell-end pipe, include the bell (with any reinforcement sleeve) as part
of at least two specimens.
B. Perform sustained pressure test in accordance with ASTM D2241 and D1599, except
that test pressure may be 6% less than that given in Table 3 of ASTM D2241. If pipe has
been tested previously, submit copy of test report.
C. Perform burst pressure test in accordance with ASTM D2241 and D1599, except that
test pressure may be 6% less than that given in Table 4 of ASTM D2241.
D. Test the flattening resistance and impact resistance of pipe produced from each extrusion
outlet at the beginning of production of each specific material or size; thereafter, test one
sample every 24-hour shift or every 100 pieces. Test a minimum of three specimens
total. Test for flattening resistance per ASTM D2241, Section 7.6. Test for impact
resistance per ASTM D256, Method A. The minimum impact strength shall be
0.65 ft-lbs/inch.
E. Test the pipe produced from each extrusion outlet by the acetone-immersion method at
the beginning of production of each specific material or size; thereafter, test one sample
every 24-hour shift or every 100 pieces. Test per ASTM D2152.
F. Perform other factory testing per ASTM D2241 and AWWA C900.
G. The phrase "beginning of production" means the beginning of production of pipe of the
same size within the same lot as the project pipe.
H. When any product fails to meet a specified test requirement, perform additional tests to
determine which products are acceptable of those produced from the same extruder or
mold as of the last favorable test. Reject pipe that fails to meet any test requirement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT MARKING
Legibly mark pipe per AWWA C900, Section 6.1, and include the seal of the testing
agency that verified the suitability of the material for potable water service (NSF in the
United States).
3.02 DELIVERY AND TEMPORARY STORAGE OF PIPE
A. Ship, store, and place pipe at the storage yard or installation site supporting the pipe
uniformly. Avoid scratching the pipe surface. Do not stack higher than 4 feet or with
weight on bells. Cover to protect from sunlight.
B. Unload pipe close to point of installation to avoid handling damage. Avoid scratching
the pipe surface.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER) 402093-4
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402093 - PVC PIPE)
C. Remove and do not install pipe that is gouged, scratched forming a clear depression, or
marred.
3.03 HANDLING PIPE
Hoist pipe with mechanical equipment using a cloth belt sling or a continuous fiber rope
that avoids scratching the pipe. Do not use a chain or wire rope sling.
3.04 INSTALLING PIPE IN TRENCHES
A. Install in accordance with Section 312316, AWWA C605, and as follows.
B. Backfill materials in the pipe zone shall be imported sand per Section 312316. Do not
add successive layers unless the previous layer is compacted to 95% relative compaction
per ASTM D1557.
C. Compact material placed within 12 inches of the outer surface of the pipe by hand
tamping only.
D. Compact trench backfill to the specified relative compaction. Do not float pipe. Do not
use high-impact hammer-type equipment except where the pipe manufacturer warrants
in writing that such use will not damage the pipe.
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF PIPE JOINT
A. The spigot and bell or bell coupling shall be dirt free and slide together without
displacing the rubber ring. Lay the pipe section with the bell coupling facing the
direction of laying.
B. Insert the rubber ring into the groove in the bell in the trench just before joining the
pipes. First clean the groove. Observe the correct direction of the shaped ring. Feel that
the ring is completely seated.
C. Lubricate the spigot over the taper and up to the full insertion mark with the lubricant
supplied by the pipe manufacturer. If the lubricated pipe end touches dirt, clean the pipe
end and reapply lubricant.
D. Insert the spigot into the bell and force it slowly into position.
E. Check that the rubber has not left the groove during assembly by passing a feeler gauge
around the completed joint.
3.06 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING
Test in accordance with City Standard 77.
3.07 DISINFECTION
Disinfect pipe in accordance with City Standard 77.
DRAFT - NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION
PVC DISTRIBUTION PIPE (14 INCHES AND LARGER) 402093-5
CITY TTHM REDUCTION PROJECT - 19 Sep 2019 (S402093 - PVC PIPE)
END OF SECTION